BSC6000 Hardware Description

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R V900R008C15
BSC Hardware Description

Issue Date 01 2010-01-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the hardware components of the BSC. It provides the users with a detailed and comprehensive reference to the Huawei BSC.
Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document. Product Name BSC Product Model BSC6000 Product Version V900R008C15
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l l
BSC installers BSC site maintenance personnel
Organization
1 Changes in BSC Hardware Description This provides the changes of the BSC Hardware Description. 2 BSC Physical Structure This describes the physical structure of the BSC, including the cabinet, cables, LMT computers, and alarm box. 3 BSC Hardware Configuration Modes The BSC has three hardware configuration modes: BM/TC separated, BM/TC combined, and A over IP. 4 BSC Cabinet
Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
Organization
The BSC uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet. The cabinet is designed in compliance with IEC60297 and IEEE standards. 5 GBCR (Configuration Type A) This describes the components, cable connections, and engineering specifications of the GBCR that is configured with the GBAM. 6 GBCR (Configuration Type B) This describes the components, cable connections, and engineering specifications of the GBCR that is configured with the GOMU. 7 GBSR Cabinet The GBSR processes the services of the BSC. A maximum of three GBSRs can be configured, depending on traffic volume. 8 BSC Subracks This describes BSC subracks. BSC subracks are used to integrate boards and backplanes into an independent unit. BSC subracks are functionally classified into the GSM main processing subrack (GMPS), GSM extended processing subrack (GEPS), and GSM transcoder subrack (GTCS). 9 BSC Boards This describes the boards in the BSC. 10 BSC Cables This describes the cables of the BSC. 11 LEDs on BSC Parts This describes the LEDs on the power distribution box and the panels. 12 DIP Switches on BSC Parts This describes the DIP switches on the subracks and the boards.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Organization
Symbol
Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
Organization
Convention Boldface >
Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
vi
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Changes in BSC Hardware Description................................................................................1-1 2 BSC Physical Structure..............................................................................................................2-1 3 BSC Hardware Configuration Modes....................................................................................3-1 4 BSC Cabinet................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Appearance of the BSC Cabinet......................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Classification of the BSC Cabinet...................................................................................................................4-3
5 GBCR (Configuration Type A)................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Components of the GBCR (Configuration Type A).......................................................................................5-3 5.2 BSC Common Power Distribution Box..........................................................................................................5-6 5.2.1 Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box...................................................................5-7 5.2.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box..............................................5-8 5.2.3 Rear Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box.....................................................................5-8 5.2.4 Technical Specifications of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box...............................................5-9 5.3 Air Defence Subrack.....................................................................................................................................5-10 5.4 KVM..............................................................................................................................................................5-11 5.5 LAN Switch...................................................................................................................................................5-12 5.6 Cabling Frame...............................................................................................................................................5-14 5.7 GBAM...........................................................................................................................................................5-15 5.7.1 Functions of the GBAM.......................................................................................................................5-15 5.7.2 Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)..........................................................................................5-15 5.7.3 Appearance of the GBAM (C5210).....................................................................................................5-19 5.7.4 Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)............................................................................................5-21 5.8 Rear Cable Trough........................................................................................................................................5-25 5.9 GBCR Cable Connections (Configuration Type A).....................................................................................5-25 5.9.1 Distribution of Power Switches in the GBCR (Configuration Type A)..............................................5-25 5.9.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type A)...................5-26 5.9.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type A).................................................5-30 5.10 Technical Specifications of the GBCR (Configuration Type A)................................................................5-36
6 GBCR (Configuration Type B)................................................................................................6-1

6.1 Components of the GBCR (Configuration Type B)........................................................................................6-2 Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
6.2 BSC High-Power Distribution Box.................................................................................................................6-5 6.2.1 Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box..........................................................................6-6 6.2.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box.....................................................6-6 6.2.3 Rear Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box...........................................................................6-7 6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box.....................................................6-8 6.3 Cable Connections of the GBCR (Configuration Type B).............................................................................6-9 6.3.1 Distribution of Power Switches in the GBCR (Configuration Type B).................................................6-9 6.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type B)...................6-11 6.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type B)..................................................6-15 6.4 Technical Specifications of the GBCR (Configuration Type B)..................................................................6-19
7 GBSR Cabinet.............................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Components of the GBSR...............................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Cable Connections of the GBSR.....................................................................................................................7-5 7.2.1 Distribution of the Power Switches in the GBSR..................................................................................7-6 7.2.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBSR............................................................7-7 7.2.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBSR.........................................................................................7-12 7.3 Technical Specifications of the GBSR..........................................................................................................7-15
8 BSC Subracks..............................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Components of the BSC Subrack....................................................................................................................8-2 8.2 BSC Fan Box...................................................................................................................................................8-4 8.2.1 Fan Box (Configuration PFCU).............................................................................................................8-5 8.2.2 Fan Box (Configuration PFCB).............................................................................................................8-7 8.3 BSC Slots........................................................................................................................................................8-9 8.4 DIP Switches on the BSC Subrack...............................................................................................................8-10 8.5 Configuration of the BSC Subrack................................................................................................................8-12 8.5.1 Configuration of the GMPS (Configuration Type A)..........................................................................8-12 8.5.2 Configuration of the GMPS (Configuration Type B)..........................................................................8-16 8.5.3 Configuration of the GEPS..................................................................................................................8-19 8.5.4 Configuration of the GTCS..................................................................................................................8-23 8.6 Technical Specifications of the BSC Subrack...............................................................................................8-24
9 BSC Boards..................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 GEIUA............................................................................................................................................................9-6 9.1.1 Functions of the GEIUA........................................................................................................................9-6 9.1.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel.......................................................................................9-6 9.1.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel...................................................................9-7 9.1.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel...................................................................9-8 9.1.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)...............................................................9-9 9.2 GEIUB...........................................................................................................................................................9-11 9.2.1 Functions of the GEIUB.......................................................................................................................9-12 9.2.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel.....................................................................................9-12 9.2.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel.................................................................9-13 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Contents
9.2.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel.................................................................9-14 9.2.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa).............................................................9-15 9.3 GEIUP...........................................................................................................................................................9-17 9.3.1 Functions of the GEIUP.......................................................................................................................9-18 9.3.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel.....................................................................................9-18 9.3.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel.................................................................9-19 9.3.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel.................................................................9-20 9.3.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa).............................................................9-21 9.4 GEIUT...........................................................................................................................................................9-23 9.4.1 Functions of the GEIUT.......................................................................................................................9-24 9.4.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel.....................................................................................9-24 9.4.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel.................................................................9-25 9.4.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel.................................................................9-26 9.4.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa).............................................................9-27 9.5 GGCU............................................................................................................................................................9-29 9.5.1 Functions of the GGCU........................................................................................................................9-29 9.5.2 GGCU Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-30 9.5.3 LEDs on the GGCU Panel...................................................................................................................9-30 9.5.4 Ports on the GGCU Panel.....................................................................................................................9-31 9.6 GOIUA..........................................................................................................................................................9-32 9.6.1 Functions of the GOIUA......................................................................................................................9-32 9.6.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...................................................................................9-32 9.6.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel..............................................................9-33 9.6.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...............................................................9-34 9.6.5 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa)..........................................9-35 9.7 GOIUB..........................................................................................................................................................9-35 9.7.1 Functions of the GOIUB......................................................................................................................9-36 9.7.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...................................................................................9-36 9.7.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel..............................................................9-37 9.7.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...............................................................9-38 9.7.5 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa)..........................................9-39 9.8 GOIUP...........................................................................................................................................................9-39 9.8.1 Functions of the GOIUP.......................................................................................................................9-40 9.8.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...................................................................................9-40 9.8.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel..............................................................9-41 9.8.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...............................................................9-42 9.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa)..........................................9-43 9.9 GOIUT..........................................................................................................................................................9-43 9.9.1 Functions of the GOIUT......................................................................................................................9-44 9.9.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...................................................................................9-44 9.9.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel..............................................................9-45 9.9.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...............................................................9-46 Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description 9.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa)..........................................9-47
9.10 GOMU.........................................................................................................................................................9-47 9.10.1 Functions of the GOMU.....................................................................................................................9-48 9.10.2 GOMU Panel......................................................................................................................................9-48 9.10.3 LEDs on the GOMU Panel.................................................................................................................9-49 9.10.4 Ports on the GOMU Panel..................................................................................................................9-50 9.11 GSCU..........................................................................................................................................................9-50 9.11.1 Functions of the GSCU......................................................................................................................9-51 9.11.2 GSCU Panel.......................................................................................................................................9-51 9.11.3 LEDs on the GSCU Panel..................................................................................................................9-52 9.11.4 Ports on the GSCU Panel...................................................................................................................9-53 9.12 GTNU..........................................................................................................................................................9-53 9.12.1 Functions of the GTNU......................................................................................................................9-53 9.12.2 GTNU Panel.......................................................................................................................................9-54 9.12.3 LEDs on the GTNU Panel..................................................................................................................9-54 9.12.4 Ports on the GTNU Panel...................................................................................................................9-55 9.13 GXPUM......................................................................................................................................................9-55 9.13.1 Functions of the GXPUM..................................................................................................................9-56 9.13.2 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel...........................................................................................9-56 9.13.3 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel......................................................................9-57 9.13.4 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel.......................................................................9-58 9.14 GXPUT........................................................................................................................................................9-58 9.14.1 Functions of the GXPUT....................................................................................................................9-59 9.14.2 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel...........................................................................................9-59 9.14.3 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel......................................................................9-60 9.14.4 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel.......................................................................9-60 9.15 GXPUI.........................................................................................................................................................9-61 9.15.1 Functions of the GXPUI.....................................................................................................................9-61 9.15.2 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel...........................................................................................9-61 9.15.3 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel......................................................................9-62 9.15.4 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel.......................................................................9-63 9.16 GFGUA.......................................................................................................................................................9-63 9.16.1 Functions of the GFGUA...................................................................................................................9-64 9.16.2 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel...........................................................................................9-64 9.16.3 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel......................................................................9-65 9.16.4 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel.......................................................................9-66 9.17 GFGUB.......................................................................................................................................................9-67 9.17.1 Functions of the GFGUB...................................................................................................................9-67 9.17.2 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel...........................................................................................9-68 9.17.3 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel......................................................................9-68 9.17.4 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel.......................................................................9-69 9.18 GFGUG.......................................................................................................................................................9-70 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Contents
9.18.1 Functions of the GFGUG...................................................................................................................9-71 9.18.2 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel...........................................................................................9-71 9.18.3 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel......................................................................9-72 9.18.4 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel.......................................................................9-73 9.19 GOGUA......................................................................................................................................................9-73 9.19.1 Functions of the GOGUA..................................................................................................................9-74 9.19.2 GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel.......................................................................................................9-74 9.19.3 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel..................................................................................9-75 9.19.4 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel...................................................................................9-76 9.19.5 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa)..............................................................9-76 9.20 GOGUB.......................................................................................................................................................9-77 9.20.1 Functions of the GOGUB...................................................................................................................9-77 9.20.2 GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel.......................................................................................................9-78 9.20.3 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel..................................................................................9-78 9.20.4 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel...................................................................................9-79 9.20.5 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa)..............................................................9-79 9.21 GEHUB.......................................................................................................................................................9-80 9.21.1 Functions of the GEHUB...................................................................................................................9-81 9.21.2 GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel..........................................................................................................9-81 9.21.3 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel.....................................................................................9-82 9.21.4 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel......................................................................................9-82 9.21.5 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa)..................................................................................9-83 9.22 GEPUG........................................................................................................................................................9-86 9.22.1 Functions of the GEPUG....................................................................................................................9-86 9.22.2 GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel..........................................................................................................9-86 9.22.3 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel.....................................................................................9-87 9.22.4 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel......................................................................................9-88 9.22.5 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa)..................................................................................9-89 9.23 GDPUC.......................................................................................................................................................9-91 9.23.1 Functions of the GDPUC(DPUa).......................................................................................................9-91 9.23.2 GDPUC(DPUa) Panel........................................................................................................................9-91 9.23.3 LEDs on the GDPUC(DPUa) Panel...................................................................................................9-92 9.24 GDPUX.......................................................................................................................................................9-93 9.24.1 Functions of the GDPUX(DPUc).......................................................................................................9-93 9.24.2 GDPUX(DPUc) Panel........................................................................................................................9-94 9.24.3 LEDs on the GDPUX(DPUc) Panel...................................................................................................9-94 9.25 GDPUP........................................................................................................................................................9-95 9.25.1 Functions of the GDPUP(DPUd).......................................................................................................9-95 9.25.2 GDPUP(DPUd) Panel........................................................................................................................9-95 9.25.3 LEDs on the GDPUP(DPUd) Panel...................................................................................................9-96 9.26 MDMC........................................................................................................................................................9-97 9.26.1 Functions of the MDMC....................................................................................................................9-97 Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description 9.26.2 MDMC Panel.....................................................................................................................................9-97 9.26.3 LEDs on the MDMC Panel................................................................................................................9-98 9.26.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC.................................................................................................................9-99
9.27 PAMU.........................................................................................................................................................9-99 9.27.1 Functions of the PAMU...................................................................................................................9-100 9.27.2 PAMU Panel....................................................................................................................................9-100 9.27.3 LEDs on the PAMU Panel...............................................................................................................9-101 9.27.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU................................................................................................................9-101 9.28 PFCU.........................................................................................................................................................9-102 9.28.1 Functions of the PFCU.....................................................................................................................9-102 9.28.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU.................................................................................................................9-102 9.29 PFCB.........................................................................................................................................................9-103 9.29.1 Functions of the PFCB.....................................................................................................................9-103 9.29.2 Jumper Pins on the PFCB ................................................................................................................9-104 9.30 WOPB.......................................................................................................................................................9-105 9.30.1 Functions of the WOPB...................................................................................................................9-105
10 BSC Cables.............................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1 Active/Standby 75-Ohm Coaxial Cable......................................................................................................10-4 10.2 Active/Standby 120-Ohm Twisted Pair Cable............................................................................................10-7 10.3 Inter-GTNU Cable.....................................................................................................................................10-11 10.4 LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable...........................................................................10-12 10.5 LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable............................................................................10-14 10.6 LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable............................................................................10-16 10.7 Crossover Cable........................................................................................................................................10-18 10.8 Straight-Through Cable.............................................................................................................................10-19 10.9 BITS Clock Signal Cable..........................................................................................................................10-26 10.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable............................................................................................................................10-28 10.11 Signal cable of the alarm box..................................................................................................................10-30 10.12 PDB monitoring signal cable..................................................................................................................10-32 10.13 EMU RS485 communication cable.........................................................................................................10-34 10.14 GOMU serial port cable..........................................................................................................................10-36 10.15 BSC Power Cable....................................................................................................................................10-36 10.16 BSC PGND cable....................................................................................................................................10-39
11 LEDs on BSC Parts.................................................................................................................11-1

11.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box...................................................11-3 11.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box..........................................................11-3 11.3 LEDs on the GDPUC(DPUa) Panel............................................................................................................11-4 11.4 LEDs on the GDPUP(DPUd) Panel............................................................................................................11-5 11.5 LEDs on the GDPUX(DPUc) Panel............................................................................................................11-5 11.6 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel..............................................................................................11-6 11.7 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel........................................................................11-6 11.8 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel...............................................................................11-7 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Contents
11.9 LEDs on the GGCU Panel..........................................................................................................................11-8 11.10 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel.........................................................................................11-9 11.11 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel...................................................................11-9 11.12 LEDs on the GOMU Panel......................................................................................................................11-10 11.13 LEDs on the GSCU Panel.......................................................................................................................11-11 11.14 LEDs on the GTNU Panel.......................................................................................................................11-12 11.15 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel...........................................................................11-13 11.16 LEDs on the MDMC Panel.....................................................................................................................11-13 11.17 LEDs on the PAMU Panel......................................................................................................................11-14
12 DIP Switches on BSC Parts..................................................................................................12-1

12.1 DIP Switches on the BSC Subrack.............................................................................................................12-2 12.2 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa)...........................................................................................12-3 12.3 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)....................................................................12-6 12.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC..........................................................................................................................12-8 12.5 DIP Switch on the PAMU...........................................................................................................................12-9 12.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU..........................................................................................................................12-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
xiii
Figures
Figures
Figure 2-1 Physical structure of the BSC.............................................................................................................2-1 Figure 4-1 Single-door BSC cabinet....................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Double-door BSC cabinet...................................................................................................................4-3 Figure 5-1 Outer components of the GBCR.........................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-2 Inner components of the GBCR.........................................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-3 Front panel of the BSC common power distribution box...................................................................5-7 Figure 5-4 Rear panel of the BSC common power distribution box....................................................................5-9 Figure 5-5 Air defence subrack..........................................................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-6 KVM.................................................................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-7 Front panel of the KVM...................................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-8 Rear panel of the KVM....................................................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-9 LAN switch.......................................................................................................................................5-12 Figure 5-10 Front panel of the LAN switch.......................................................................................................5-13 Figure 5-11 Rear panel of the LAN switch........................................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-12 Cabling frame.................................................................................................................................5-15 Figure 5-13 GBAM............................................................................................................................................5-16 Figure 5-14 Front panel of the GBAM...............................................................................................................5-16 Figure 5-15 Rear panel of the GBAM................................................................................................................5-18 Figure 5-16 GBAM............................................................................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-17 Front panel of the GBAM...............................................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-18 Rear panel of the GBAM................................................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-19 GBAM............................................................................................................................................5-22 Figure 5-20 Front panel of the GBAM...............................................................................................................5-22 Figure 5-21 Rear panel of the GBAM................................................................................................................5-24 Figure 5-22 Rear cable trough............................................................................................................................5-25 Figure 5-23 Distribution of the power switches in the GBCR...........................................................................5-26 Figure 5-24 Distribution of power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (IBM X3650T)..............................5-27 Figure 5-25 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (C5210/HP CC3310)...................5-29 Figure 5-26 Connections of signal cables in the GBCR (IBM X3650T)...........................................................5-31 Figure 5-27 Connections of signal cables in the GBCR (C5210/HP CC3310)..................................................5-32 Figure 6-1 Outer components of the GBCR.........................................................................................................6-3 Figure 6-2 Inner components of the GBCR.........................................................................................................6-4 Figure 6-3 Front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box.........................................................................6-6 Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv
Figures
HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description Figure 6-4 Rear panel of the BSC high-power distribution box..........................................................................6-7
Figure 6-5 Distribution of the power switches in the GBCR (1)....................................................................... 6-10 Figure 6-6 Distribution of the power switches in the GBCR (2)....................................................................... 6-11 Figure 6-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (1)...................................................6-12 Figure 6-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (2)...................................................6-14 Figure 6-9 Connections of the signal cables in the GBCR.................................................................................6-16 Figure 7-1 Outer components of the GBSR.........................................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Inner components of the GBSR..........................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-3 Distribution of the power switches in the GBSR (1)..........................................................................7-6 Figure 7-4 Distribution of the power switches in the GBSR (2)..........................................................................7-7 Figure 7-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR (1).....................................................7-9 Figure 7-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR (2)...................................................7-11 Figure 7-7 Connections of the signal cables in the GBSR.................................................................................7-13 Figure 8-1 Structure of the BSC subrack.............................................................................................................8-3 Figure 8-2 Fan box (Configuration PFCU)..........................................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-3 Fan box (Configuration PFCB)..........................................................................................................8-7 Figure 8-4 Slot assignment in the BSC subrack.................................................................................................8-10 Figure 8-5 DIP switch on the BSC subrack....................................................................................................... 8-10 Figure 8-6 Fully configured GMPS (1)..............................................................................................................8-13 Figure 8-7 Fully configured GMPS (2)..............................................................................................................8-13 Figure 8-8 Fully configured GMPS (3)..............................................................................................................8-14 Figure 8-9 Fully configured GMPS (4)..............................................................................................................8-14 Figure 8-10 Fully configured GMPS (5)............................................................................................................8-15 Figure 8-11 Fully configured GMPS (6)............................................................................................................8-15 Figure 8-12 Fully configured GMPS (1)............................................................................................................8-16 Figure 8-13 Fully configured GMPS (2)............................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-14 Fully configured GMPS (3)............................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-15 Fully configured GMPS (4)............................................................................................................8-18 Figure 8-16 Fully configured GMPS (5)............................................................................................................8-18 Figure 8-17 Fully configured GMPS (6)............................................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-18 Fully configured GEPS (1).............................................................................................................8-20 Figure 8-19 Fully configured GEPS (2).............................................................................................................8-20 Figure 8-20 Fully configured GEPS (3).............................................................................................................8-21 Figure 8-21 Fully configured GEPS (4).............................................................................................................8-21 Figure 8-22 Fully configured GEPS (5).............................................................................................................8-22 Figure 8-23 Fully configured GEPS (6).............................................................................................................8-22 Figure 8-24 Fully configured GTCS (1).............................................................................................................8-23 Figure 8-25 Fully configured GTCS (2).............................................................................................................8-24 Figure 9-1 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel...............................................................................................9-7 Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT.................................................9-9 Figure 9-3 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel.............................................................................................9-13 Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT...............................................9-15 xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Figures
Figure 9-5 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel.............................................................................................9-19 Figure 9-6 Layout of the DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT...............................................9-21 Figure 9-7 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel.............................................................................................9-25 Figure 9-8 Layout of the DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT...............................................9-27 Figure 9-9 GGCU panel.....................................................................................................................................9-30 Figure 9-10 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel.........................................................................................9-33 Figure 9-11 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel.........................................................................................9-37 Figure 9-12 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel.........................................................................................9-41 Figure 9-13 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel.........................................................................................9-45 Figure 9-14 GOMU panel..................................................................................................................................9-48 Figure 9-15 GSCU panel....................................................................................................................................9-51 Figure 9-16 GTNU panel...................................................................................................................................9-54 Figure 9-17 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel....................................................................................................9-57 Figure 9-18 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel....................................................................................................9-59 Figure 9-19 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel....................................................................................................9-62 Figure 9-20 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel...................................................................................................9-65 Figure 9-21 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel...................................................................................................9-68 Figure 9-22 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel...................................................................................................9-71 Figure 9-23 GOGUA/GOGUB panel.................................................................................................................9-75 Figure 9-24 GOGUA/GOGUB panel.................................................................................................................9-78 Figure 9-25 GEHUB/GEPUG panel..................................................................................................................9-81 Figure 9-26 DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG...........................................................................................9-84 Figure 9-27 GEHUB/GEPUG panel..................................................................................................................9-87 Figure 9-28 DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG...........................................................................................9-89 Figure 9-29 GDPUC panel.................................................................................................................................9-92 Figure 9-30 GDPUX panel.................................................................................................................................9-94 Figure 9-31 GDPUP panel.................................................................................................................................9-96 Figure 9-32 MDMC panel..................................................................................................................................9-98 Figure 9-33 DIP switch on the MDMC..............................................................................................................9-99 Figure 9-34 PAMU panel.................................................................................................................................9-100 Figure 9-35 DIP switch on the PAMU.............................................................................................................9-101 Figure 9-36 DIP switch on the PFCU..............................................................................................................9-103 Figure 9-37 Jumper pins on the PFCB.............................................................................................................9-104 Figure 10-1 Active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.............................................................................................10-4 Figure 10-2 Installation position of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable...................................................10-7 Figure 10-3 Active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable...................................................................................10-8 Figure 10-4 Installation position of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.......................................10-11 Figure 10-5 Inter-GTNU cable.........................................................................................................................10-11 Figure 10-6 Installation position of the inter-GTNU cable..............................................................................10-12 Figure 10-7 LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable..................................................................10-13 Figure 10-8 Installation position of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable.......................10-14 Figure 10-9 LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable..................................................................10-15 Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii
Figures
HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description Figure 10-10 Installation position of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable.....................10-16
Figure 10-11 LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable................................................................10-17 Figure 10-12 Installation position of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable.....................10-18 Figure 10-13 Crossover cable...........................................................................................................................10-19 Figure 10-14 Straight-through cable................................................................................................................10-20 Figure 10-15 Connections between the GSCUs and the GBAM.....................................................................10-21 Figure 10-16 Connection between the GBAM and the LAN switch...............................................................10-22 Figure 10-17 Connection between the LAN switch and the M2000 (LAN)....................................................10-22 Figure 10-18 Connection between the LAN switch and the BSC LMT computer..........................................10-23 Figure 10-19 Connection between the LAN switch and the CBC...................................................................10-23 Figure 10-20 Installation position of the Straight-through cable between the GSCUs....................................10-24 Figure 10-21 Connection between the GOMU and the LAN of the customer.................................................10-25 Figure 10-22 Connection between the GXPUM and the CBC........................................................................10-26 Figure 10-23 75-ohm coaxial clock cable........................................................................................................10-27 Figure 10-24 120-ohm clock conversion cable................................................................................................10-27 Figure 10-25 Installation position of the BITS clock signal cable...................................................................10-28 Figure 10-26 Y-shaped clock cable..................................................................................................................10-29 Figure 10-27 Installation position of the Y-shaped clock cable.......................................................................10-30 Figure 10-28 Alarm box signal cable...............................................................................................................10-31 Figure 10-29 Installation position of the signal cable of the alarm box...........................................................10-31 Figure 10-30 PDB monitoring signal cable......................................................................................................10-32 Figure 10-31 Installation positions of the PDB monitoring signal cable.........................................................10-33 Figure 10-32 RS485 communication cable......................................................................................................10-34 Figure 10-33 Connecting the cable between the EMU and the power distribution box of the cabinet............10-35 Figure 10-34 GOMU serial port cable.............................................................................................................10-36 Figure 10-35 BSC external/internal power cable.............................................................................................10-38 Figure 10-36 BSC external/internal power cable.............................................................................................10-39 Figure 10-37 BSC PGND cable.......................................................................................................................10-41 Figure 12-1 DIP switch on the BSC subrack.....................................................................................................12-2 Figure 12-2 DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG...........................................................................................12-4 Figure 12-3 Layout of the DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT.............................................12-6 Figure 12-4 DIP switch on the MDMC..............................................................................................................12-8 Figure 12-5 DIP switch on the PAMU...............................................................................................................12-9 Figure 12-6 DIP switch on the PFCU..............................................................................................................12-10
xviii
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Components of the BSC.......................................................................................................................2-2 Table 3-1 BSC hardware configuration modes....................................................................................................3-1 Table 5-1 Inner components of the GBCR...........................................................................................................5-6 Table 5-2 LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box................................................5-8 Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the BSC power distribution box...............................................................5-9 Table 5-4 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch......................................................................................5-13 Table 5-5 Silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM.....................................................................................5-16 Table 5-6 Silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM.......................................................................................5-18 Table 5-7 Silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM.....................................................................................5-19 Table 5-8 Silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM.......................................................................................5-21 Table 5-9 Silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM.....................................................................................5-22 Table 5-10 Silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM.....................................................................................5-24 Table 5-11 Distribution of the power switches in the GBCR.............................................................................5-26 Table 5-12 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR.................................................................................5-28 Table 5-13 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR.................................................................................5-30 Table 5-14 Signal cables in the GBCR...............................................................................................................5-33 Table 5-15 Structural specifications of the GBCR.............................................................................................5-36 Table 5-16 Electrical specifications of the GBCR............................................................................................. 5-37 Table 6-1 Inner Components of the GBCR..........................................................................................................6-5 Table 6-2 LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box......................................................6-7 Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the BSC high-power distribution box......................................................6-8 Table 6-4 Mapping between the power switches and the components (1).........................................................6-10 Table 6-5 Mapping between the power switches and the components (2).........................................................6-11 Table 6-6 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (1)............................................................................. 6-13 Table 6-7 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (2)............................................................................. 6-14 Table 6-8 Signal cables in the GBCR.................................................................................................................6-17 Table 6-9 Structural specifications of the GBCR...............................................................................................6-20 Table 6-10 Electrical specifications of the GBCR............................................................................................. 6-20 Table 7-1 Inner components of the GBSR...........................................................................................................7-5 Table 7-2 Mapping between the power switches and the components (1)...........................................................7-6 Table 7-3 Mapping between the power switches and the components (2)...........................................................7-7 Table 7-4 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR (1)..............................................................................7-10 Table 7-5 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR (2)..............................................................................7-12 Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix
Tables
HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description Table 7-6 Signal cables in the GBSR.................................................................................................................7-14 Table 7-7 Structural specifications of the GBSR...............................................................................................7-15 Table 7-8 Electrical specifications of the GBSR................................................................................................7-16 Table 8-1 Components of the BSC subrack.........................................................................................................8-4 Table 8-2 LED on the fan box (Configuration PFCU).........................................................................................8-5 Table 8-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (Configuration PFCU)...........................................................8-6 Table 8-4 LED on the fan box (Configuration PFCB).........................................................................................8-8 Table 8-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (Configuration PFCB)...........................................................8-9 Table 8-6 Definitions of the DIP bits.................................................................................................................8-11 Table 8-7 Setting of the DIP switches................................................................................................................8-12 Table 8-8 Technical specifications of the GMPS...............................................................................................8-24 Table 8-9 Technical specifications of the GEPS................................................................................................8-25 Table 8-10 Technical specifications of the GTCS..............................................................................................8-25 Table 9-1 Boards in the BSC................................................................................................................................9-1 Table 9-2 LEDs on the board...............................................................................................................................9-7 Table 9-3 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel............................................................................9-8 Table 9-4 DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT.......................................................................9-10 Table 9-5 Switch types related to the DIP bits...................................................................................................9-11 Table 9-6 LEDs on the board.............................................................................................................................9-13 Table 9-7 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel..........................................................................9-14 Table 9-8 DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT.......................................................................9-16 Table 9-9 Switch types related to the DIP bits...................................................................................................9-17 Table 9-10 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................9-19 Table 9-11 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel........................................................................9-20 Table 9-12 DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT.....................................................................9-22 Table 9-13 Switch types related to the DIP bits.................................................................................................9-23 Table 9-14 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................9-25 Table 9-15 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel........................................................................9-26 Table 9-16 DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT.....................................................................9-28 Table 9-17 Switch types related to the DIP bits.................................................................................................9-29 Table 9-18 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................9-31 Table 9-19 Ports on the GGCU panel.................................................................................................................9-31 Table 9-20 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................9-33 Table 9-21 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel......................................................................9-34 Table 9-22 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT..................................................9-35 Table 9-23 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................9-37 Table 9-24 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel......................................................................9-38 Table 9-25 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT..................................................9-39 Table 9-26 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................9-41 Table 9-27 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel......................................................................9-42 Table 9-28 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT..................................................9-43 Table 9-29 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................9-45
xx
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Tables
Table 9-30 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel......................................................................9-46 Table 9-31 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT..................................................9-47 Table 9-32 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-49 Table 9-33 Ports on the GOMU panel................................................................................................................9-50 Table 9-34 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-52 Table 9-35 LEDs of the Ethernet ports...............................................................................................................9-52 Table 9-36 Ports on the GSCU panel................................................................................................................. 9-53 Table 9-37 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-55 Table 9-38 Ports on the GTNU panel.................................................................................................................9-55 Table 9-39 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-57 Table 9-40 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel..................................................................................9-58 Table 9-41 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-60 Table 9-42 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel..................................................................................9-60 Table 9-43 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-62 Table 9-44 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel..................................................................................9-63 Table 9-45 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-65 Table 9-46 LEDs of the Ethernet ports...............................................................................................................9-66 Table 9-47 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel.................................................................................9-66 Table 9-48 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-69 Table 9-49 LEDs of the Ethernet ports...............................................................................................................9-69 Table 9-50 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel.................................................................................9-70 Table 9-51 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-72 Table 9-52 LEDs of the Ethernet ports...............................................................................................................9-72 Table 9-53 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel.................................................................................9-73 Table 9-54 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-75 Table 9-55 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel..............................................................................................9-76 Table 9-56 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB......................................................................... 9-76 Table 9-57 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-79 Table 9-58 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel..............................................................................................9-79 Table 9-59 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB......................................................................... 9-80 Table 9-60 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-82 Table 9-61 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel................................................................................................9-82 Table 9-62 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (75-ohm coaxial cable)............................................................9-84 Table 9-63 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (120-ohm twisted pair cable)...................................................9-85 Table 9-64 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-87 Table 9-65 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel................................................................................................9-88 Table 9-66 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (75-ohm coaxial cable)............................................................9-90 Table 9-67 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (120-ohm twisted pair cable)...................................................9-90 Table 9-68 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-92 Table 9-69 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-94 Table 9-70 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-96 Table 9-71 LEDs on the board........................................................................................................................... 9-98 Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi
Tables
HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description Table 9-72 Setting of S2.....................................................................................................................................9-99 Table 9-73 LEDs on the board.........................................................................................................................9-101 Table 9-74 Settings of SW1..............................................................................................................................9-102 Table 9-75 Settings of S1.................................................................................................................................9-103 Table 9-76 Setting of the pins...........................................................................................................................9-104 Table 10-1 List of BSC cables............................................................................................................................10-1 Table 10-2 Mapping between the micro coaxial cables and the pins of the DB44 connector ..........................10-5 Table 10-3 Mapping between the signals and the bearing media.......................................................................10-5 Table 10-4 Mapping between the twisted pair cables and the pins of the DB44 connector ..............................10-6 Table 10-5 Mapping between the 120-ohm twisted pair cables and the pins of the DB44 connector ..............10-8 Table 10-6 Pins at both ends of the twisted pair cable.......................................................................................10-9 Table 10-7 Mapping between the twisted pair cables and the pins of the DB44 connector ............................10-10 Table 10-8 Pins at both ends of the crossover cable.........................................................................................10-19 Table 10-9 Pins at both ends of the straight-through cable..............................................................................10-20 Table 10-10 Pins of the alarm box signal cable................................................................................................10-31 Table 10-11 Pins of the PDB monitoring signal cable.....................................................................................10-32 Table 10-12 Pins of the PDB monitoring signal cable.....................................................................................10-33 Table 10-13 Pins of the RS485 communication cable.....................................................................................10-34 Table 10-14 Pins of the GOMU serial port cable.............................................................................................10-36 Table 10-15 List of the BSC external power cables.........................................................................................10-37 Table 10-16 List of the BSC internal power cables..........................................................................................10-37 Table 10-17 List of the BSC external power cables.........................................................................................10-38 Table 10-18 List of the BSC internal power cables..........................................................................................10-38 Table 10-19 List of the BSC PGND cables......................................................................................................10-40 Table 11-1 LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box............................................11-3 Table 11-2 LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box..................................................11-3 Table 11-3 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................11-4 Table 11-4 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................11-5 Table 11-5 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................11-5 Table 11-6 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................11-6 Table 11-7 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................11-7 Table 11-8 LEDs on the board...........................................................................................................................11-7 Table 11-9 LEDs of the Ethernet ports...............................................................................................................11-8 Table 11-10 LEDs on the board.........................................................................................................................11-8 Table 11-11 LEDs on the board.........................................................................................................................11-9 Table 11-12 LEDs on the board.........................................................................................................................11-9 Table 11-13 LEDs on the board.......................................................................................................................11-10 Table 11-14 LEDs on the board.......................................................................................................................11-11 Table 11-15 LEDs of the Ethernet ports...........................................................................................................11-12 Table 11-16 LEDs on the board.......................................................................................................................11-12 Table 11-17 LEDs on the board.......................................................................................................................11-13 Table 11-18 LEDs on the board.......................................................................................................................11-13
xxii
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Tables
Table 11-19 LEDs on the board.......................................................................................................................11-14 Table 12-1 Definitions of the DIP bits...............................................................................................................12-2 Table 12-2 Setting of the DIP switches..............................................................................................................12-3 Table 12-3 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (75-ohm coaxial cable)............................................................12-4 Table 12-4 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (120-ohm twisted pair cable)...................................................12-5 Table 12-5 DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT.....................................................................12-7 Table 12-6 Switch types related to the DIP bits.................................................................................................12-8 Table 12-7 Setting of S2.....................................................................................................................................12-9 Table 12-8 Settings of SW1................................................................................................................................12-9 Table 12-9 Settings of S1.................................................................................................................................12-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
xxiii
1 Changes in BSC Hardware Description
Changes in BSC Hardware Description

This provides the changes of the BSC Hardware Description.
01(2010-01-30) of V900R008C15
This is the initial commercial release.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
1-1
2 BSC Physical Structure
2
OM equipment room Equipment room Alarm box Ethernet cable
BSC Physical Structure
This describes the physical structure of the BSC, including the cabinet, cables, LMT computers, and alarm box. Figure 2-1 shows the physical structure of the BSC. Figure 2-1 Physical structure of the BSC
Optical cable to other NEs Trunk cable to other NEs Ethernet cable to other NEs PGND cable to the PDF Power cable to the PDF
Serial port cable
LMT
LMT
LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal
Table 2-1 lists the components of the BSC.
Ethernet cable
GBCR
GBSR
GBSR
PDF: Power Distribution Frame
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
2-1
2 BSC Physical Structure
Table 2-1 Components of the BSC Component GSM BSC control processing rack (GBCR) Introduction The GBCR provides switching and processes services for the BSC. One GBCR is configured in a BSC. The GBSR processes various services for the BSC. The number of GBSRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume. Zero to three GBSRs can be configured. BSC cables are classified into the Ethernet cables, optical cables, and E1/T1 cables. The number of BSC cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. The LMT is a computer that is installed with the LMT software package and is connected to the OM network of the NEs. It is optional for the BSC. The alarm box can generate audible and visual alarms. It is optional for the BSC. Refer to... For details, refer to 5 GBCR (Configuration Type A) and 6 GBCR (Configuration Type B).
GSM BSC service processing rack (GBSR)
7 GBSR Cabinet
BSC Cables
10 BSC Cables
BSC LMT
LMT-Related Definitions
Alarm box
User manual delivered with the alarm box
2-2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
3 BSC Hardware Configuration Modes
BSC Hardware Configuration Modes
The BSC has three hardware configuration modes: BM/TC separated, BM/TC combined, and A over IP. Table 3-1 describes the three BSC hardware configuration modes. Table 3-1 BSC hardware configuration modes Descripti on BM/TC separated (built-in PCU) Cabinet
l l
Subrack
l l l
Boards
l l l l l l l l l l l l
Cable
l
GBCR GBSR
GMPS GEPS GTCS
GXPUM GXPUT GXPUI GTNU GSCU GGCU GOMU GDPUX GDPUP GEPUG/GFGUG GEIUA/GOIUA GEIUB/GOIUB/ GFGUB/GOGUB/ GEHUB GEIUT/GOIUT
Clock cable BITS clock signal cable Y-shaped clock cable Ethernet cable Crossover cable Straight-through Ethernet cable Optical cable LC/PC-LC/PCsingle-mode/multimode optical cable LC/PC-FC/PCsingle-mode/multimode optical cable LC/PC-SC/PCsingle-mode/multimode optical cable E1/T1 cable Active/standby 75ohm coaxial cable
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
3-1
Descripti on BM/TC separated (external PCU)
Cabinet
l l
Subrack
l l l
Boards
l l l l l l l l l l
Cable Active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable Inter-GTNU cable
GBCR GBSR
GMPS GEPS GTCS
GXPUM GXPUT GXPUI GTNU GSCU GGCU GOMU GDPUX GEIUA/GOIUA GEIUB/GOIUB/ GFGUB/GOGUB/ GEHUB GEIUT/GOIUT GEIUP/GOIUP GXPUM GXPUT GXPUI GTNU GSCU GGCU GOMU GDPUX GDPUP GEPUG/GFGUG GEIUA/GOIUA GEIUB/GOIUB/ GFGUB/GOGUB/ GEHUB
l l l l l
Signal cable of the alarm box PDB monitoring signal cable EMU RS485 communication cable GOMU serial port cable
l l
BM/TC combined (built-in PCU)
l l
GBCR GBSR
l l
GMPS GEPS
3-2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Descripti on BM/TC combined (external PCU)
Cabinet
l l
Subrack
l l
Boards
l l l l l l l l l l
Cable
GBCR GBSR
GMPS GEPS
GXPUM GXPUT GXPUI GTNU GSCU GGCU GOMU GDPUX GEIUA/GOIUA GEIUB/GOIUB/ GFGUB/GOGUB/ GEHUB GEIUP/GOIUP GXPUM GXPUT GXPUI GTNU GSCU GGCU GOMU GDPUX GDPUP GEPUG/GFGUG GFGUA/GOGUA GEIUB/GOIUB/ GFGUB/GOGUB/ GEHUB
A over IP (built-in PCU)
l l
GBCR GBSR
l l
GMPS GEPS
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
3-3
Descripti on A over IP (external PCU)
Cabinet
l l
Subrack
l l
Boards
l l l l l l l l l l
Cable
GBCR GBSR
GMPS GEPS
GXPUM GXPUT GXPUI GTNU GSCU GGCU GOMU GDPUX GFGUA/GOGUA GEIUB/GOIUB/ GFGUB/GOGUB/ GEHUB GEIUP/GOIUP
3-4
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
4 BSC Cabinet
4
About This Chapter
BSC Cabinet
The BSC uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet. The cabinet is designed in compliance with IEC60297 and IEEE standards. 4.1 Appearance of the BSC Cabinet The dimensions of the BSC cabinet are as follows: 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth). The BSC cabinets are classified into single-door cabinets and double-door cabinets. 4.2 Classification of the BSC Cabinet Based on functions, the BSC cabinets are classified into the GBCR and the GBSR.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
4-1
4 BSC Cabinet
4.1 Appearance of the BSC Cabinet

The dimensions of the BSC cabinet are as follows: 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth). The BSC cabinets are classified into single-door cabinets and double-door cabinets. Figure 4-1 shows a single-door BSC cabinet. Figure 4-2 shows a double-door BSC cabinet. Figure 4-1 Single-door BSC cabinet
4-2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
4 BSC Cabinet
Figure 4-2 Double-door BSC cabinet
4.2 Classification of the BSC Cabinet

Based on functions, the BSC cabinets are classified into the GBCR and the GBSR.
GBCR
The GBCR processes primary services and provides OM for the BSC. One GBCR is configured in a BSC. Based on the hardware configuration, the GBCR is classified into configuration type A and configuration type B.
l
In configuration type A, the GBCR is configured with the GBAM. For details, refer to 5 GBCR (Configuration Type A). In configuration type B, the GBCR is configured with the GOMU. For details, refer to 6 GBCR (Configuration Type B).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-3
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
4 BSC Cabinet
GBSR
The GBSR processes various services for the BSC. The number of GBSRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume. Zero to three GBSRs can be configured. For details, refer to 7 GBSR Cabinet.
4-4
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5 GBCR (Configuration Type A)
5
About This Chapter
GBCR (Configuration Type A)
This describes the components, cable connections, and engineering specifications of the GBCR that is configured with the GBAM. 5.1 Components of the GBCR (Configuration Type A) This describes the outer components and inner components of the GBCR. 5.2 BSC Common Power Distribution Box Each BSC cabinet must be configured with one power distribution box, which is installed at the top of the BSC cabinet. 5.3 Air Defence Subrack The air defence subrack is installed between two service subracks. It shields hot air from affecting the service subracks and forms a straight-through air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U high. 5.4 KVM The KVM is an integrated device, which consists of a keyboard, an LCD display, and a mouse. It serves as the operating platform for the GBAM. The KVM can be configured when the GBCR is in configuration type A. 5.5 LAN Switch The LAN switch is installed in the GBCR. Each BSC should be configured with one LAN switch. 5.6 Cabling Frame The cabling frame provides space for collecting the Ethernet cables of the LAN switch. 5.7 GBAM There are three types of GBAM used in the BSC: IBM X3650T, C5210, and HP CC3310. The GBAM is installed in the GBCR. Each BSC can be configured with one GBAM. 5.8 Rear Cable Trough The rear cable trough is used to route and bind the cables for the boards that are inserted into the rear slots of the subrack. Three fiber management trays are installed at the bottom of each rear cable trough. They are used to coil optical cables. 5.9 GBCR Cable Connections (Configuration Type A) The cables of the GBCR consist of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-1
5.10 Technical Specifications of the GBCR (Configuration Type A) The technical specifications of the GBCR consist of structural specifications and electrical specifications.
5-2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5.1 Components of the GBCR (Configuration Type A)

This describes the outer components and inner components of the GBCR. The outer components of the GBCR consist of the rack, side doors, front door, and rear door. The inner components of the GBCR vary with the configuration type. In configuration type A, the inner components of the GBCR consist of the power distribution box, subracks, air defence subrack, KVM, LAN switch, cabling frame, GBAM, and rear cable trough.
Outer Components of the GBCR

Figure 5-1 shows the outer components of the GBCR.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-3
Figure 5-1 Outer components of the GBCR
2 1
(1) Rack
(2) Side door
(3) Front and back doors
5-4
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Inner Components of the GBCR

Figure 5-2 shows the inner components of the GBCR. Figure 5-2 Inner components of the GBCR
8 1
8 9
10
10 5 1 1 1 4 3 1 1 2 4 5
Front view
Rear view
(1) Filler panel (2) GBAM (6) Subrack (7) Air defence subrack
(3) Cabling frame
(4) LAN switch
(5) KVM
(8) Power distribution box (9) Cable rack in the (10) Rear cable cabinet trough
Table 5-1 lists the inner components of the GBCR.

Table 5-1 Inner components of the GBCR Component Power distribution box Subrack Description One (mandatory) One mandatory GMPS, and one optional GEPS or GTCS When the cabinet is configured with two subracks, one air defence subrack should be configured. One (optional) One (mandatory) One (mandatory) One (mandatory) Each subrack should be configured with one rear cable trough. Refer to... BSC Common Power Distribution Box BSC Subracks
Air defence subrack
Air Defence Subrack
KVM LAN switch Cabling frame GBAM Rear cable trough
KVM LAN Switch Cabling Frame GBAM Rear Cable Trough
NOTE
In configuration type A, the GBCR should be configured with the BSC common power distribution box.
5.2 BSC Common Power Distribution Box

Each BSC cabinet must be configured with one power distribution box, which is installed at the top of the BSC cabinet. The BSC common power distribution box provides lightning protection and overcurrent protection for two -48 V inputs, which are then divided into two groups to supply power to the functional modules in the BSC. (Each group has three -48 V outputs and three RTN outputs.) The power distribution box also detects the input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and visual alarms when faults occur. 5.2.1 Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box The components on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box are the panel of the MDMC, label for power distribution switches, power distribution switches, and panel of the overvoltage protection board. 5.2.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box The LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box are labeled RUN and ALM. 5.2.3 Rear Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
This describes the components on the rear panel of the BSC common power distribution box. These components are the power input terminal block, the power output terminal block, and the port used to connect the power distribution box to a service subrack. 5.2.4 Technical Specifications of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box The technical specifications of the BSC power distribution box consist of the input specifications and output specifications.
5.2.1 Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box

The components on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box are the panel of the MDMC, label for power distribution switches, power distribution switches, and panel of the overvoltage protection board. Figure 5-3 shows the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box. Figure 5-3 Front panel of the BSC common power distribution box
1
-48V1, 70 A -48V2, 70 A
2 3 4
RUN ALM ON OFF

MONITOR
ALARM
SW1
SW2 SW3
SW4 SW5 SW6
5
(1) Panel of the MDMC (5) Label for power distribution switches
NOTE
6
(2) RUN LED (6) Power distribution switches (3) ALM LED
7
(4) Mute switch
(7) Panel of the overvoltage protection board
For details on the MDMC and the overvoltage protection board, refer to 9.26 MDMC and 9.30 WOPB.
CAUTION
l
When turning on or turning off the power distribution switches, you can refer to the label for power distribution switches. To disassemble a device, switch off the device, and then disconnect the power cable from the device.
You can determine whether the power distribution box generates an audible alarm by setting the mute switch.
l
If you set the switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it detects a fault. If you set the switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when it detects a fault.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5.2.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box
The LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box are labeled RUN and ALM. Table 5-2 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box. Table 5-2 LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s Off ALM Red Off On Meaning The MDMC is operating and communicating with the GSCU. The MDMC is not operating or not communicating with the GSCU. There is no power supply to the MDMC or the power distribution box is faulty. There is no alarm. The power distribution box is faulty. The ALM LED, however, is always on during the MDMC self-test. It is an indication that the ALM LED is functional.
NOTE
When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time. Meanwhile, the monitoring board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs normally display the operating status of the power distribution box.
5.2.3 Rear Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box

This describes the components on the rear panel of the BSC common power distribution box. These components are the power input terminal block, the power output terminal block, and the port used to connect the power distribution box to a service subrack. Figure 5-4 shows the rear panel of the BSC common power distribution box.
5-8
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Figure 5-4 Rear panel of the BSC common power distribution box
RTN RTN -48V2 -48V1
-48V1 RTN -48V1 RTN -48V1 RTN -48V2 RTN -48V2 RTN -48V2 RTN
-48V IN
OR NIT MO TS POR
-48V OUT
(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block (3) Port used to connect the power distribution box to a service subrack
NOTE
l l
Figure 5-4 shows the main ports related to the BSC. The port for connecting a service subrack is connected to the lowest service subrack in the cabinet through the monitoring signal cable of the power distribution box.
The wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48V and RTN on the power input terminal block and power output terminal block.
5.2.4 Technical Specifications of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box

The technical specifications of the BSC power distribution box consist of the input specifications and output specifications. Table 5-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC power distribution box. Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the BSC power distribution box Item Input specifications Sub Item Rated input voltage Input voltage Input mode Maximum input current Specification -48 V DC -40 V DC to -57 V DC Two -48 V DC inputs Two inputs, each of which has a maximum input current of 100 A -48 V DC
5-9
Output specifications
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Rated output voltage
Item
Sub Item Output voltage Independent output
Specification -40 V DC to -57 V DC Six groups of independent power output: Each group consists of one -48 V output and one RTN output. The output of current is controlled by a switch, which performs short-circuiting functions. When the total current of the six groups of power output is smaller than 100 A, the maximum current of each power output is 70 A. The current at the overcurrent protection point is 87.5 A. You need to restore the default value manually. 4,800 W in hot backup mode
Output protection specifications
Rated output power
5.3 Air Defence Subrack

The air defence subrack is installed between two service subracks. It shields hot air from affecting the service subracks and forms a straight-through air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U high.
Appearance
Figure 5-5 shows the air defence subrack. Figure 5-5 Air defence subrack
Dimensions
The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm (depth).
5.4 KVM
The KVM is an integrated device, which consists of a keyboard, an LCD display, and a mouse. It serves as the operating platform for the GBAM. The KVM can be configured when the GBCR is in configuration type A.
Appearance
Figure 5-6 shows the KVM. Figure 5-6 KVM
Front Panel
Figure 5-7 shows the front panel of the KVM. Figure 5-7 Front panel of the KVM
(1) Handle
(2) KVM switch
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-11
Rear Panel
Figure 5-8 shows the rear panel of the KVM. Figure 5-8 Rear panel of the KVM
1 2 3
(1) Grounding bolt 3. Power switch
(2) DC power input socket (4) Cable connectors for the KVM
NOTE
To push the KVM completely into the cabinet, use your index fingers to press and hold the white button on both sides of the KVM, and then push the KVM into the cabinet while sliding the buttons outwards. When you feel resisting force, release the buttons.
5.5 LAN Switch

The LAN switch is installed in the GBCR. Each BSC should be configured with one LAN switch. The LAN switch provides 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex Ethernet ports for the BSC. The LMT computer accesses the BSC through the LAN switch. The BSC also accesses the M2000 through the LAN switch.
Appearance of the LAN Switch

The LAN switch used in the BSC is the Quidway S3026C. Figure 5-9 shows the LAN switch. Figure 5-9 LAN switch
5-12
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Front Panel of the LAN Switch

The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are the mode switch button, configuration ports, and LEDs, and Ethernet ports. Figure 5-10 shows the front panel of the LAN switch. Figure 5-10 Front panel of the LAN switch
2 4 1 3
Quidway S3500 Series
5 (1) Power LED (3) D/S LED (5) 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports (2) A/L LED
(4) MODE switch button (6) Configuration port (CONSOLE)
NOTE
l l
You can configure the LAN switch through the configuration port to meet the BSC requirements. You can change the status indicated by the LEDs of the 10M/100M BASE-TX Ethernet ports by setting the MODE switch button of the LAN switch.
LEDs on the Front Panel of the LAN Switch

The LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch consist of the power LED, A/L LEDs, and D/ S LEDs. Table 5-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch. Table 5-4 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch LED Colo r Gree n Yello w (on the left) Gree n (on the right)
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Status On Off On (blinking ) OFF ON OFF
Meaning The power supply to the LAN switch is normal. The LAN switch is not powered on. The port is active and there is data flow. The port is active but there is no data flow. The port is correctly linked. The port is not linked or wrongly linked.
POWER
A/L
5-13
LED
Colo r Yello w (on the left) Gree n (on the right)
Status ON OFF ON OFF
Meaning The port is in full duplex mode. The port is in half duplex mode. The data rate on the port is 100 Mbit/s. The data rate on the port is 10 Mbit/s.
D/S
NOTE
Only ports 2, 4, 20, 22, and 24 on the LAN switch are used. The other ports are reserved.
Rear Panel of the LAN Switch

The components on the rear panel of the LAN switch are the DC power socket and the PGND post. Figure 5-11 shows the rear panel of the LAN switch. Figure 5-11 Rear panel of the LAN switch
NEG(-) RTN(+)
2 (2) PGND post
(1) DC power socket
5.6 Cabling Frame

The cabling frame provides space for collecting the Ethernet cables of the LAN switch. Figure 5-12 shows the cabling frame.
5-14
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Figure 5-12 Cabling frame
Cabling frame
5.7 GBAM
There are three types of GBAM used in the BSC: IBM X3650T, C5210, and HP CC3310. The GBAM is installed in the GBCR. Each BSC can be configured with one GBAM. 5.7.1 Functions of the GBAM The GBAM serves as a bridge between the LMT and the BSC. 5.7.2 Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) This describes the IBM X3650T, which serves as the GBAM. 5.7.3 Appearance of the GBAM (C5210) This describes the C5210, which serves as the GBAM. 5.7.4 Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310) This describes the HP CC3310, which serves as the GBAM.
5.7.1 Functions of the GBAM

The GBAM serves as a bridge between the LMT and the BSC. The GBAM performs the following functions:
l
Controls the communication between the LMT computer and boards, facilitates the data configuration of the LMT, and filters the performance and alarm data Processes the commands issued by the LMT computer/M2000, and then forwards the commands to the boards in the BSC for processing Filters the results from the BSC boards, and then returns the results to the LMT computer
5.7.2 Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

This describes the IBM X3650T, which serves as the GBAM. Figure 5-13 shows the GBAM.
Figure 5-13 GBAM
Front Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

The components on the front panel of the GBAM are the CD drive, LEDs, ports, and switches. Figure 5-14 shows the front panel of the GBAM. Figure 5-14 Front panel of the GBAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
16 15
13 11 14 12 10
Table 5-5 describes the silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM. Table 5-5 Silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM SN 1 2 3 4 CRT Silkscreen None Description CD-ROM drive Power switch Reset switch The CRT LED indicates the critical alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a critical fault occurs in the system and the system cannot work properly. The MJR LED indicates the major alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a major fault occurs in the system. Though the system can work properly, its performance deteriorates.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
MJR
5-16
SN 6
Silkscreen MNR
Description The MNR LED indicates the minor alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a minor fault occurs in the system. The system can still work properly. The PWR LED indicates the power fault information. When the indicator is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty. Serial port, with an 8-pin RJ45 connector USB port
PWR
8 9 10 0
Indicates the status of the read and write function of hard disk 0. When the LED is green, the read and write function of the hard disk is normal; when the LED is yellow, the read and write function of the hard disk is not normal. Indicates the status of the read and write function of hard disk 1. When the LED is green, the read and write function of the hard disk is normal; when the LED is yellow, the read and write function of the hard disk is not normal. Main power LED NIC0/NIC1 LED System ID LED ID switch, used to switch the system ID.
11
12 13 14 15 16
ON
None
NMI switch. When the NMI switch is pressed, the GBAM is in the pause state and continues to diagnose faults.
Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

The components on the rear panel of the GBAM are the power port, grounding post, and signal ports. Figure 5-15 shows the rear panel of the GBAM.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-17
Figure 5-15 Rear panel of the GBAM
Table 5-6 describes the silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM. Table 5-6 Silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM SN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Silkscreen Alarms None None None None Description DB15 alarm port (output port for the alarm information of the GBAM) PCI extension slot (not configured) PCI extension slot (configured) Port of the 10M/100M adaptive Ethernet adapter Power module PS/2 port, used to connect the keyboard and the mouse. The upper one is connected to the mouse and the lower one is connected to the keyboard. Serial port, with an 8-pin RJ45 connector 1 2 RJ45 NIC1 connector RJ45 NIC2 connector Video connector 1 0 USB 1 USB 0 Configuration port of the GBAM
SCSI LVD/SE
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ultra320 SCSI port PGND post
5-18
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5.7.3 Appearance of the GBAM (C5210)

This describes the C5210, which serves as the GBAM. Figure 5-16 shows the GBAM. Figure 5-16 GBAM
Front Panel of the GBAM (C5210)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
17 16
14 12 10 15 13 11 9
Table 5-7 describes the silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM. Table 5-7 Silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM SN 1 2 3 4 CRT Silkscreen None Description CD-ROM drive Power switch Reset switch The CRT LED indicates the critical alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a critical fault occurs in the system and the system cannot work properly.
5-19
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
SN 5
Silkscreen MJR
Description The MJR LED indicates the major alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a major fault occurs in the system. Though the system can work properly, its performance deteriorates. The MNR LED indicates the minor alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a minor fault occurs in the system. The system can still work properly. The PWR LED indicates the power fault information. When the indicator is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty. Serial port, with an 8-pin RJ45 connector USB port
MNR
PWR
8 9 10 11 2
12
13 14 15 16 17
ON
None
Rear Panel of the GBAM (C5210)

5-20
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)

12 11 9
+ + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Table 5-8 describes the silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM. Table 5-8 Silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM SN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 None 2 None
SCSI LVD/SE
Silkscreen 1
Description USB 1 Video connector Ultra320 SCSI port RJ45 NIC1 connector Mouse/keyboard connector; A Y-shaped cable can be used to connect the mouse and the keyboard. Serial port, with an 8-pin RJ45 connector USB 2 Port of the 10M/100M adaptive Ethernet adapter PGND post DC input socket; The connector labeled "-" is fixed to a -48 V cable, and the connector labeled "+" is fixed to an RTN cable. DB15 alarm port (output port for the alarm information of the GBAM) RJ45 NIC0 connector
11 12
Alarms
5.7.4 Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

This describes the HP CC3310, which serves as the GBAM. Figure 5-19 shows the GBAM.
Figure 5-19 GBAM
Front Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
17 16
14 12 10 15 13 11 9
Table 5-9 describes the silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM. Table 5-9 Silkscreens on the front panel of the GBAM SN 1 2 3 4 CRT Silkscreen None Description CD-ROM drive Power switch Reset switch The CRT LED indicates the critical alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a critical fault occurs in the system and the system cannot work properly. The MJR LED indicates the major alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a major fault occurs in the system. Though the system can work properly, its performance deteriorates.
MJR
5-22
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
SN 6
Silkscreen MNR
Description The MNR LED indicates the minor alarm information. When the indicator is on (yellow), a minor fault occurs in the system. The system can still work properly. The PWR LED indicates the power fault information. When the indicator is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty. Serial port, with an 8-pin RJ45 connector USB port
PWR
8 9 10 11 2
12
13 14 15 16 17
ON
None
Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-23

8 8 12 11 9
+ + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10
Table 5-10 describes the silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM. Table 5-10 Silkscreens on the rear panel of the GBAM SN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 None 2 None
SCSI LVD/SE
Silkscreen 1
Description USB 1 Video connector Ultra320 SCSI port RJ45 NIC1 connector Mouse/keyboard connector; A Y-shaped cable can be used to connect the mouse and the keyboard. Serial port, with an 8-pin RJ45 connector USB 2 Port of the 10M/100M adaptive Ethernet adapter PGND post DC input socket; The connector labeled "-" is fixed to a -48 V cable, and the connector labeled "+" is fixed to an RTN cable. DB15 alarm port (output port for the alarm information of the GBAM) RJ45 NIC0 connector
11 12
Alarms
5-24
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5.8 Rear Cable Trough

The rear cable trough is used to route and bind the cables for the boards that are inserted into the rear slots of the subrack. Three fiber management trays are installed at the bottom of each rear cable trough. They are used to coil optical cables. Figure 5-22 shows the rear cable trough. Figure 5-22 Rear cable trough
Fiber management trays
5.9 GBCR Cable Connections (Configuration Type A)

The cables of the GBCR consist of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables. 5.9.1 Distribution of Power Switches in the GBCR (Configuration Type A) Each of the six power outputs of the power distribution box at the top of the GBCR supplies power to a component in the GBCR in a fixed way. 5.9.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type A) The power cables of the GBCR are used to connect the PDF to the PDB. This ensures a stable power supply for the GBCR. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the PDF or to the grounding bar in the equipment room. This protects the cabinet from electrostatic discharge. 5.9.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type A) The signal cables in the GBCR consist of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/ standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable,inter-GTNU cable, BITS clock cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and PDB monitoring signal cable.
5.9.1 Distribution of Power Switches in the GBCR (Configuration Type A)

Each of the six power outputs of the power distribution box at the top of the GBCR supplies power to a component in the GBCR in a fixed way. Figure 5-23 shows the mapping between the six power control switches on the power distribution box and the components in the GBCR. Table 5-11 lists the mapping between the power control switches and the components.
Figure 5-23 Distribution of the power switches in the GBCR
Distribution of power switches
SW1SW4
Subrack-1
SW2SW5 SW3 SW3 SW3SW6
Subrack-0
KVM
LAN Switch
GBAM
Table 5-11 Distribution of the power switches in the GBCR Component Subrack 1 Subrack 0 KVM LAN Switch GBAM Power Switch SW1 and SW4 SW2 and SW5 SW3 SW3 SW3 and SW6
5.9.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type A)
The power cables of the GBCR are used to connect the PDF to the PDB. This ensures a stable power supply for the GBCR. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the PDF or to the grounding bar in the equipment room. This protects the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
l
Figure 5-24 shows the GBCR configured with the IBM X3650T GBAM.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-26

l
Figure 5-25 shows the GBCR configured with the C5210/HP CC3310 GBAM.
Figure 5-24 Distribution of power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (IBM X3650T)
PGND wiring post on the top of the cabinet Power distribution box Power distribution box
V V V V V V R1 R1 R2 R1 R2 R2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 11.1 11.2 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
Subrack
18
Subrack
17
DC input1 NEG(-) RTN(+) 1 2
MONITOR
14
Subrack
Subrack
19
16
MONITOR
15
KVM
2 0
1 1
I O
LAN switch
11.1. 1 11.2. 1 2 1
11.2.2 11.1.2 GBAM
2 2
2 3
11.1.3 11.2.3
24 25
26 27
28 29
30 31
PGND wiring post on the base of the cabinet Rear view
Vx: -48Vx Rx: RTNx
PGND wiring post on the base of the cabinet Front view
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-27
Table 5-12 lists the power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR. Table 5-12 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR Number 1-8 11 12 11.1.1 and 11.2.1 11.1.2, 11.2.2, 11.1.3, and 11.2.3 13 14, 15, 16, and 17 18 and 19 20 21 22 and 23 24-31 Description Power cables for the BSC subracks Power cable for the KVM PDB monitoring cable Power cables for the LAN switch Power cables for the GBAM PGND cable connecting the PDB and the busbar PGND cables for the BSC subracks PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets PGND cable for the KVM PGND cable for the LAN switch PGND cables for the GBAM PGND cables for the cabinet doors
5-28
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Figure 5-25 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (C5210/HP CC3310)
V V V V V V R1 R1 R1 R2 R2 R2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 11.1 11.2 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
Subrack
Subrack
18
17
MONITOR
14
Subrack
19
Subrack
16
MONITOR
DC input2 NEG(-) RTN(+) 15 7 8
KVM
2 0
1 1
I O
LAN switch
11.1. 1 11.2. 1 2 1 11.2.2 11.1.2 2 2 2 3 10.2 9.2 9.3 10.3 11.1.3 11.2.3
GBAM
24 25
26 27
28 29
30 31
PGND wiring post on the base of the cabinet

Rear view
Vx: -48Vx Rx: RTNx
PGND wiring post on the base of the cabinet

Front view
Table 5-13 describes the power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR.
Table 5-13 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR Number 1-8 11 12 11.1.1 and 11.2.1 9.2, 9.3, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.2, 11.2.2, 11.1.3, and 11.2.3 13 14, 15, 16, and 17 18 and 19 20 21 22 and 23 24-31 Description Power cables for the BSC subracks Power cable for the KVM PDB monitoring cable Power cables for the LAN switch Power cables for the GBAM PGND cable connecting the PDB and the busbar PGND cables for the BSC subracks PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets PGND cable for the KVM PGND cable for the LAN switch PGND cables for the GBAM PGND cables for the cabinet doors
5.9.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type A)

The signal cables in the GBCR consist of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/ standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable,inter-GTNU cable, BITS clock cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and PDB monitoring signal cable.
l l
Figure 5-26 shows the GBCR configured with the IBM X3650T GBAM. Figure 5-27 shows the GBCR configured with the C5210/HP CC3310 GBAM.
5-30
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Figure 5-26 Connections of signal cables in the GBCR (IBM X3650T)

13
Power distribution box

9 10 11
12 15 16
GEPS
11
7 8
17
14
GEPS
MONITOR
16 15
10 17
GMPS
9 13
7 8
6 5 14 4 3 2 1
MONITOR
12 18
GMPS
23 19
24 21 22 20
18 19 23 20
LAN switch
Rear view
Front view
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-31
Figure 5-27 Connections of signal cables in the GBCR (C5210/HP CC3310)

13
9 10
11
12 15 16
GEPS
11
7 8
17
14
GEPS
MONITOR
16 15
10 17
GMPS
9 13
7 8
6 5 14 4 3 2 1
MONITOR
12 18
GMPS
23 19
24 21 22 20
18
LAN switch
23 20 19
Rear view
NOTE
Front view
Figure 5-26 and Figure 5-27 show the connections of signal cables between a GMPS and a GEPS. If there are more than one GEPS, you need to connect each GEPS to the GMPS directly. The connection method is the same as the method of connecting the first GEPS to the GMPS. The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure 5-26 and Figure 5-27 are examples. The actual types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables depend on the site plan.
Table 5-14 describes the connections of the signal cables in the GBCR.
5-32
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Table 5-14 Signal cables in the GBCR S N Description Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 SMB male connector/ CLKIN1 port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 13 of the GMPS SMB male connector/ CLKIN0 port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 13 of the GMPS SMB male connector/ CLKIN1 port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 12 of the GMPS SMB male connector/ CLKIN0 port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 12 of the GMPS RJ45/CLKOUT port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 12 or 13 of the GMPS RJ45/CLKOUT port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 12 or 13 of the GMPS DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GMPS Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 Connector attached to the BITS clock/ BITS clock port Remarks
75-ohm coaxial clock cable (or 120-ohm clock conversion cable) connecting the GGCU to the BITS clock port 75-ohm coaxial clock cable (or 120-ohm clock conversion cable) connecting the GGCU to the BITS clock port 75-ohm coaxial clock cable (or 120-ohm clock conversion cable) connecting the GGCU to the BITS clock port 75-ohm coaxial clock cable (or 120-ohm clock conversion cable) connecting the GGCU to the BITS clock port Y-shaped clock cable connecting the GGCU to the GSCU
Connector attached to the BITS clock/ BITS clock port
Figure 5-26 shows the clock cables that are connected to the CLKIN1 and CLKIN0 ports. Generally, only one port is used to connect to the BITS clock.
RJ45/CLKIN port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GEPS RJ45/CLKIN port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GEPS DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GEPS
Y-shaped clock cable connecting the GGCU to the GSCU
Inter-GTNU cable
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-33
S N
Description
Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GMPS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 14 of the GEPS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 15 of the GEPS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 14 or 15 of the GEPS DB15/port connecting the PDB to a service subrack LC optical port/slot 27 of the GEPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GMPS
Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GEPS DDF or other NEs
Remarks
Inter-GTNU cable
E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs
10
DDF or other NEs
11
DDF or other NEs
12
PDB monitoring signal cable
DB15/ MONITOR port on the lowest subrack OIUa in the GTCS, or ODF, or other NEs RJ45/10/100/10 00BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GEPS RJ45/10/100/10 00BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GEPS
13
Optical cable
14
Inter-GSCU Ethernet cable
15
5-34
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
S N
Description
Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GMPS RJ45/GBAM
Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 RJ45/10/100/10 00BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GEPS RJ45/10/100/10 00BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GEPS RJ45/10/100/10 00BASE-T10 port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/10 00BASE-T10 port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GEPS RJ45/Ethernet port on the LAN switch RJ45/LMT computer
Remarks
16
17
18
Ethernet cable between the GSCU and the GBAM
19
Ethernet cable between the GSCU and the GBAM
RJ45/GBAM
20
Ethernet cable between the LAN switch and the GBAM Ethernet cable between the LAN switch and the LMT computer
RJ45/Ethernet port on the GBAM
The GBAM is connected to port 2 on the LAN switch. The LMT computer is connected to port 22 on the LAN switch. The M2000 (LAN) is connected to port 24 on the LAN switch.
21
RJ45/Ethernet port on the LAN switch
22
Ethernet cable between the LAN switch and the M2000 (LAN)
RJ45/Ethernet port on the M2000 (LAN)
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-35
S N
Description
Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 DB25 male connector/KVM signal input port
Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 DB15 male connector/ GBAM monitor port (PS2 male connector)/Yshaped KVM mouse port (PS2 male connector)/ Y-shaped KVM key port RJ45/Ethernet port on the M2000 (LAN)
Remarks
23
Ethernet cable between the GBAM and the KVM
24
Ethernet cable between the LAN switch and the CBC
The CBC is connected to port 20 on the LAN switch.
5.10 Technical Specifications of the GBCR (Configuration Type A)

The technical specifications of the GBCR consist of structural specifications and electrical specifications. Table 5-15 describes the structural specifications of the GBCR. Table 5-15 Structural specifications of the GBCR Specification Cabinet standard Dimensions Height available Weight Load-bearing capacity of the equipment room Value IEC60297 standard and IEEE standard 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth) 46 U Empty cabinet 100 kg; cabinet in full configuration 300 kg 450 kg/m2
Table 5-16 describes the electrical specifications of the GBCR.
5-36
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Table 5-16 Electrical specifications of the GBCR Specification Rated input voltage Input voltage Value -48 V -40 V to -57 V
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
5-37
6 GBCR (Configuration Type B)
6
About This Chapter
GBCR (Configuration Type B)
This describes the components, cable connections, and engineering specifications of the GBCR that is configured with the GOMU. 6.1 Components of the GBCR (Configuration Type B) This describes the outer components and inner components of the GBCR. 6.2 BSC High-Power Distribution Box Each BSC cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box, which is installed at the top of the BSC cabinet. 6.3 Cable Connections of the GBCR (Configuration Type B) The cables of the GBCR consist of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables. 6.4 Technical Specifications of the GBCR (Configuration Type B) The technical specifications of the GBCR consist of structural specifications and electrical specifications.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
6-1
6.1 Components of the GBCR (Configuration Type B)

This describes the outer components and inner components of the GBCR. The outer components of the GBCR consist of the rack, side doors, front door, and rear door. The inner components of the GBCR vary with the configuration type. In configuration type B, the inner components of the GBCR consist of the power distribution box, subracks, air defence subrack, and rear cable trough.
Outer Components of the GBCR

Figure 6-1 shows the outer components of the GBCR.
6-2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Figure 6-1 Outer components of the GBCR
2 1
(1) Rack
(2) Side door
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
6-3
Inner Components of the GBCR

Figure 6-2 shows the inner components of the GBCR. Figure 6-2 Inner components of the GBCR
4 1
4 5
Front view
Rear view
(1) Filler panel (4) Power distribution box
(2) Subrack (5) Cable rack in the cabinet
(3) Air defence subrack (6) Rear cable trough
Table 6-1 lists the inner components of the GBCR.

Table 6-1 Inner Components of the GBCR Componen t Power distribution box Subrack Air defence subrack Description Based on the power consumption of the GBCR, one BSC common power distribution box or one BSC highpower distribution box is configured. One mandatory GMPS, and one or two optional GEPSs or GTCSs
l
Refer to... BSC Common Power Distribution Box and BSC HighPower Distribution Box BSC Subracks Air Defence Subrack
When the cabinet is configured with two subracks, one air defence subrack should be configured. When the cabinet is configured with three subracks, two air defence subracks should be configured.
Rear cable trough
Each subrack should be configured with one rear cable trough.
Rear Cable Trough
NOTE
In configuration type B, the GBCR can be configured with the BSC common power distribution box or the BSC high-power distribution box.
6.2 BSC High-Power Distribution Box

Each BSC cabinet must be configured with a power distribution box, which is installed at the top of the BSC cabinet. The BSC-high power distribution box provides lightning protection and overcurrent protection for four -48 V inputs, which are then divided into two groups to supply power to the functional modules in the BSC. (Each group has three -48 V outputs and three RTN outputs.) The power distribution box also detects the input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and visual alarms when faults occur. 6.2.1 Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box The components on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box are the panel of the MDMC and the power switches. 6.2.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box The LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box are labeled RUN and ALM. 6.2.3 Rear Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box The components on the rear panel of the BSC high-power distribution box are the power input terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a service subrack, and 2-hole grounding screw. 6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box The technical specifications of the BSC high-power distribution box consist of the input specifications and output specifications.
6.2.1 Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box

The components on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box are the panel of the MDMC and the power switches. Figure 6-3 shows the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box. Figure 6-3 Front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box
1 A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5
RUN ALM MUTE l O
SUBRCK-2 SUBRCK-1 SUBRCK-0 SUBRCK-2 SUBRCK-1 SUBRCK-0
5 B
6 7 8 9 10
2 3 4
(1) Panel of the MDMC (4) Mute switch

NOTE
(2) RUN LED (5) Power distribution switches
(3) ALM LED (6) Label for power distribution switches
For details of the MDMC, refer to 9.27 PAMU.
CAUTION
l
When turning on or turning off the power distribution switches, you can refer to the label for power distribution switches. To disassemble a device, switch off the device, and then disconnect the power cable from the device.
You can determine whether the power distribution box generates an audible alarm by setting the mute switch.
l
If you set the mute switch to 1, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it detects a fault. If you set the mute switch to 0, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when it detects a fault.
6.2.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box
The LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box are labeled RUN and ALM. Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box.
Table 6-2 LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Off ALM Red Off On Meaning The PAMU is working and communicating with the GSCU. The PAMU is not working or not communicating with the GSCU. The PAMU has no power input or the power distribution box is faulty. There is no alarm. The power distribution box is faulty. The ALM LED, however, is always on during the PAMU self-test. It is an indication that the ALM LED is functional.
NOTE
6.2.3 Rear Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box

The components on the rear panel of the BSC high-power distribution box are the power input terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a service subrack, and 2-hole grounding screw. Figure 6-4 shows the rear panel of the BSC high-power distribution box. Figure 6-4 Rear panel of the BSC high-power distribution box
1 A 3
(1) Power input terminal block (3) Port used to connect the power distribution box to a service subrack
(2) Power output terminal block (4) 2-hole grounding screw
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
6-7

NOTE
l l
Figure 6-4 shows the main ports related to the BSC. On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable are labeled 3(-), 2(-), and 1(-), and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3(+), 2 (+), and 1(+). On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+) respectively .
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box

The technical specifications of the BSC high-power distribution box consist of the input specifications and output specifications. Table 6-3 lists the technical specifications of the BSC high-power distribution box. Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the BSC high-power distribution box Item Input specifications Sub Item Rated input voltage Input voltage Input mode Specification -48 V DC or -60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each group has one to two -48 V DC/-60 V DC power inputs. The maximum rated input current of each route is 100 A. -48 V DC or -60 V DC -40 V DC to -72 V DC Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group has one to three -48 V DC/-60 V DC power outputs. The maximum rated output current of each output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A. Each output is controlled by the MCBs: A8-A10 and B8-B10. These MCBs provide the overcurrent protection function. Output protection specifications Rated output power The current at the overcurrent protection point is 70 A. You need to restore the default value manually. 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group has two 48 V DC power outputs.)
Maximum input current Output specifications Rated output voltage Output voltage Independent output
6-8
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Item
Sub Item
Specification
NOTE For group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1-A8, and power input A3 corresponds to power outputs A9-A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs B1B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9-B10.
6.3 Cable Connections of the GBCR (Configuration Type B)

The cables of the GBCR consist of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables. 6.3.1 Distribution of Power Switches in the GBCR (Configuration Type B) The GBCR can be configured with the BSC common power distribution box or the BSC highpower distribution box. Each of the six power outputs of the power distribution box supplies power to a component in the GBCR in a fixed way. 6.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type B) The power cables of the GBCR are used to connect the PDF to the PDB. This ensures a stable power supply for the GBCR. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the PDF or to the grounding bar in the equipment room. This protects the cabinet from electrostatic discharge. The connections of power cables in the cabinet vary with the types of power distribution box in use. 6.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type B) The signal cables in the GBCR consist of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/ standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-GTNU cable, BITS clock cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and PDB monitoring signal cable.
6.3.1 Distribution of Power Switches in the GBCR (Configuration Type B)

The GBCR can be configured with the BSC common power distribution box or the BSC highpower distribution box. Each of the six power outputs of the power distribution box supplies power to a component in the GBCR in a fixed way.
Distribution of the Power Switches in the GBSR (Common Power Distribution Box)
Figure 6-5 shows the mapping between the six power control switches on the power distribution box and the components in the GBCR. Table 6-4 lists the mapping between the power control switches and the components.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
6-9
Figure 6-5 Distribution of the power switches in the GBCR (1)
SW1, SW4
Subrack-2
SW2, SW5
Subrack-1
SW3, SW6
Subrack-0
Table 6-4 Mapping between the power switches and the components (1) Component Subrack 2 Subrack 1 Subrack 0 Power Switch SW1 and SW4 SW2 and SW5 SW3 and SW6
Distribution of the Power Switches in the GBCR (High-Power Distribution Box)

Figure 6-6 shows the mapping between the six power control switches on the high-power distribution box and the components in the GBCR. Table 6-5 lists the mapping between the power control switches and the components.
6-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Figure 6-6 Distribution of the power switches in the GBCR (2)
A8B8
Subrack-2
A9B9
Subrack-1
A10B10
Subrack-0
Table 6-5 Mapping between the power switches and the components (2) Component Subrack 2 Subrack 1 Subrack 0 Power Switch A8 and B8 A9 and B9 A10 and B10
6.3.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type B)
The power cables of the GBCR are used to connect the PDF to the PDB. This ensures a stable power supply for the GBCR. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the PDF or to the grounding bar in the equipment room. This protects the cabinet from electrostatic discharge. The connections of power cables in the cabinet vary with the types of power distribution box in use.
Connections of the Power Cables and PGND Cables (Common Power Distribution Box Configured)
Figure 6-7 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR.
Figure 6-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (1)
V V V V V V R R R R R R 2 2 2 1 1 1 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1 5.1 6.1 1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2 5.2 6.2
7 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6
Subrack
14
Subrack
13
DC input1 NEG(-) RTN(+) 1.1 1.2
MONITOR
Subrack
15
Subrack
12
MONITOR
Subrack
16
Subrack
11
MONITOR
DC input2 NEG(-) RTN(+) 10 6.1 6.2
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Vx: -48Vx Rx: RTN
6-12
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Table 6-6 lists the power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR. Table 6-6 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (1) Number 1.1 and 1.2; 2.1 and 2.2; 3.1 and 3.2; 4.1 and 4.2; 5.1 and 5.2; 6.1 and 6.2 7 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 14, 15, and 16 17-24 Description Power cables for the BSC subracks PGND cable for the power distribution box PGND cables for the BSC subracks Inter-cabinet PGND cables PGND cables for the cabinet doors
Connections of the Power Cables and PGND Cables (High-Power Distribution Box Configured)
Figure 6-8 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
6-13
Figure 6-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (2)
A 1
RUN AL M MUT E
1 0
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 0
6 4 2
12 10 8
5 3 1
11 9 7
13
Subrack
20
Subrack
MONITO R
Subrack
Subrack
21
18
MONITO R
Subrack
Subrack
22 DC input1 NEG(-) RTN(+) 17 5 23 24 6 MONITO R DC input2 NEG(-) RTN(+) 16 11 12 25 26 27 28 29 30
Table 6-7 lists the power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR. Table 6-7 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBCR (2) SN 1 and 2; 3 and 4; 5 and 6; 7 and 8; 9 and 10; 11 and 12 Description Power cables for the BSC subracks
6-14
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
SN 13 14, 15, and 16; 17, 18, and 19 20, 21, and 22 23-30
Description PGND cable connecting the PDB and the busbar PGND cables connecting the busbars of different subracks PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets PGND cables for the cabinet doors
6.3.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBCR (Configuration Type B)

The signal cables in the GBCR consist of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/ standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-GTNU cable, BITS clock cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and PDB monitoring signal cable. Figure 6-9 shows the connections of the signal cables in the GBCR.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
6-15
Figure 6-9 Connections of the signal cables in the GBCR

Power
13 11 9,10 distribution box
12
GTCS
7 8 18 19 20 21
GTCS
15 16
MONITOR
11
6 5
GEPS
7 8
GEPS
15 14 10 9 22
7
MONITOR
17 14
6 5
GMPS
13
GMPS
8
21 20
4 3 2 1
MONITOR
17 16 12 19 18
Rear view
Front view
NOTE
l l
Figure 6-9 takes the configuration of one GMPS, one GEPS, and one GTCS as an example. The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure 6-9 are examples. The actual types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables depend on the site plan.
Table 6-8 describes the connections of the signal cables in the GBCR.
6-16
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Table 6-8 Signal cables in the GBCR SN Description Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 SMB male connector/CLKIN1 port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 13 of the GMPS Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 Connector attached to the BITS clock/ BITS clock port Remarks
75-ohm coaxial clock cable (or 120ohm clock conversion cable) connecting the GGCU to the BITS clock port 75-ohm coaxial clock cable (or 120ohm clock conversion cable) connecting the GGCU to the BITS clock port 75-ohm coaxial clock cable (or 120ohm clock conversion cable) connecting the GGCU to the BITS clock port 75-ohm coaxial clock cable (or 120ohm clock conversion cable) connecting the GGCU to the BITS clock port Y-shaped clock cable connecting the GGCU to the GSCU Y-shaped clock cable connecting the GGCU to the GSCU Inter-GTNU cable
SMB male connector/CLKIN0 port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 13 of the GMPS
Figure 6-9 shows the clock cables that are connected to the CLKIN1 and CLKIN0 ports. Generally, only one port is used to connect to the BITS clock.
RJ45/CLKOUT port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 12 or 13 of the GMPS RJ45/CLKOUT port on the GGCU that is installed in slot 12 or 13 of the GMPS DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GMPS
RJ45/CLKIN port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GEPS RJ45/CLKIN port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GEPS DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GEPS
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
6-17
SN
Description
Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GMPS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 14 of the GEPS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 15 of the GEPS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 14 or 15 of the GEPS DB15/port connecting the PDB to a service subrack LC optical port/slot 27 of the GEPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GMPS
Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GEPS DDF or other NEs
Remarks
Inter-GTNU cable
E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs PDB monitoring signal cable Optical cable
10
DDF or other NEs
11
DDF or other NEs
12
DB15/MONITOR port on the lowest subrack OIUa in the GTCS, or ODF, or other NEs RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GEPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GEPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GEPS
13
14
15
16
6-18
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
SN
Description
Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T10 port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T10 port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GMPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GMPS RJ45/GOMU Ethernet port
Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GEPS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000 BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GTCS RJ45/Ethernet port on the M2000 (LAN)
Remarks
17
18
19
20
21
22
Ethernet cable between the GOMU and the M2000 (LAN)
ETH0/ETH1 port on the GOMU, connecting to the M2000 (LAN)
6.4 Technical Specifications of the GBCR (Configuration Type B)

The technical specifications of the GBCR consist of structural specifications and electrical specifications. Table 6-9 describes the structural specifications of the GBCR.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
6-19
Table 6-9 Structural specifications of the GBCR Specification Cabinet standard Dimensions Height of the available space Weight Load-bearing capacity of the equipment room Value IEC60297 standard and IEEE standard 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth) 46 U Empty cabinet 100 kg; fully configured cabinet 300 kg 450 kg/m2
Table 6-10 describes the electrical specifications of the GBCR. Table 6-10 Electrical specifications of the GBCR Specification Rated input voltage Input voltage Value -48 V -40 V to -57 V
6-20
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7 GBSR Cabinet
7
About This Chapter
GBSR Cabinet
The GBSR processes the services of the BSC. A maximum of three GBSRs can be configured, depending on traffic volume. 7.1 Components of the GBSR This describes the inner components and outer components of the GBSR. 7.2 Cable Connections of the GBSR The cables of the GBSR consist of power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables. 7.3 Technical Specifications of the GBSR The technical specifications of the GBSR consist of structural specifications and electrical specifications.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7-1
7 GBSR Cabinet
7.1 Components of the GBSR

This describes the inner components and outer components of the GBSR. The outer components of the GBSR consist of the rack, side doors, front door, and rear door. The inner components of the GBSR consist of the power distribution box, subracks, air defence subracks, and rear cable troughs.
Outer Components of the GBSR

Figure 7-1 shows the outer components of the GBSR.
7-2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7 GBSR Cabinet
Figure 7-1 Outer components of the GBSR
2 1
(1) Rack
(2) Side door
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7-3
7 GBSR Cabinet
Inner Components of the GBSR

Figure 7-2 shows the inner components of the GBSR. Figure 7-2 Inner components of the GBSR
4 1
4 5
Front view
Rear view
(1) Filler panel (4) Power distribution box
(2) Subrack (5) Cable rack in the cabinet
(3) Air defence subrack (6) Rear cable trough
Table 7-1 describes the inner components of the GBSR.

7 GBSR Cabinet
Table 7-1 Inner components of the GBSR Component Power distribution box Description Based on the power consumption of the GBSR, one BSC common power distribution box or one BSC highpower distribution box is configured. One to three GEPSs (GTCSs) are configured.
l
Refer to... BSC Common Power Distribution Box and BSC High-Power Distribution Box
Subrack Air defence subrack
BSC Subracks Air Defence Subrack
When the cabinet is configured with two subracks, one air defence subrack should be configured. When the cabinet is configured with three subracks, two air defence subracks should be configured.
Rear cable trough
Each subrack should be configured with one rear cable trough.
Rear Cable Trough
NOTE
l l
If the GBCR is in configuration type A, the GBSR should be configured with the BSC common power distribution box. If the GBCR is in configuration type B, the GBSR can be configured with the BSC common power distribution box or the BSC high-power distribution box.
7.2 Cable Connections of the GBSR

The cables of the GBSR consist of power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables. 7.2.1 Distribution of the Power Switches in the GBSR The GBSR can be configured with the BSC common power distribution box or the BSC highpower distribution box. Each of the six power outputs of the power distribution box supplies power to a component in the GBSR in a fixed way. 7.2.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBSR The power cables in the GBSR are used to connect the PDF to the power distribution box. This ensures a stable power supply for the GBSR. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the PDF or to the grounding bar in the equipment room. This protects the cabinet from electrostatic discharge. 7.2.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBSR The signal cables in the GBSR consist of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-GTNU cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and PDB monitoring signal cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7-5
7 GBSR Cabinet
7.2.1 Distribution of the Power Switches in the GBSR

The GBSR can be configured with the BSC common power distribution box or the BSC highpower distribution box. Each of the six power outputs of the power distribution box supplies power to a component in the GBSR in a fixed way.
Distribution of the Power Switches in the GBSR (Common Power Distribution Box)
Figure 7-3 shows the mapping between the six power control switches on the power distribution box and the components in the GBSR. Table 7-2 lists the mapping between the power control switches and the components. Figure 7-3 Distribution of the power switches in the GBSR (1)
SW1SW4
Subrack-2
SW2SW5
Subrack-1
SW3SW6
Subrack-0
Table 7-2 Mapping between the power switches and the components (1) Component Subrack 2 Subrack 1 Subrack 0 Power Switch SW1 and SW4 SW2 and SW5 SW3 and SW6
7-6
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7 GBSR Cabinet
Distribution of the Power Switches in the GBSR (High-Power Distribution Box)

Figure 7-4 shows the mapping between the six power control switches on the high-power distribution box and the components in the GBSR. Table 7-3 lists the mapping between the power control switches and the components. Figure 7-4 Distribution of the power switches in the GBSR (2)
A8B8
Subrack-2
A9B9
Subrack-1
A10B10
Subrack-0
Table 7-3 Mapping between the power switches and the components (2) Component Subrack 2 Subrack 1 Subrack 0 Power Switch A8 and B8 A9 and B9 A10 and B10
7.2.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the GBSR

The power cables in the GBSR are used to connect the PDF to the power distribution box. This ensures a stable power supply for the GBSR. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the PDF or to the grounding bar in the equipment room. This protects the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
7 GBSR Cabinet
Figure 7-5 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR.
7-8
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7 GBSR Cabinet
Figure 7-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR (1)
V V V V V V R R R R R R 2 2 2 1 1 1 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1 5.1 6.1 1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2 5.2 6.2
Subrack
14
Subrack
13
MONITOR
Subrack
15
Subrack
12
MONITOR
Subrack
16
Subrack
11
MONITOR
DC input2 NEG(-) RTN(+) 10 6.1 6.2
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Vx: -48Vx Rx: RTN
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7-9
7 GBSR Cabinet
Table 7-4 describes the power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR. Table 7-4 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR (1) Number 1.1 and 1.2; 2.1 and 2.2; 3.1 and 3.2; 4.1 and 4.2; 5.1 and 5.2; 6.1 and 6.2 7 and 8 9 10, 11, and 12 13, 14, and 15 16-23 Description Power cables for the BSC subracks PGND cables for the cabinet busbar PGND cable for the power distribution box PGND cables for the BSC subracks Inter-cabinet PGND cables PGND cables for the cabinet doors
Figure 7-6 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR.
7-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7 GBSR Cabinet
Figure 7-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR (2)
V V V V V V R R R R R R 2 2 2 1 1 1 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1 5.1 6.1 1.2 2.2 3.2 4.2 5.2 6.2
Subrack
14
Subrack
13
MONITOR
Subrack
15
Subrack
12
MONITOR
Subrack
16
Subrack
11
MONITOR
DC input2 NEG(-) RTN(+) 10 6.1 6.2
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Vx: -48Vx Rx: RTN
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7-11
7 GBSR Cabinet
Table 7-5 describes the power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR. Table 7-5 Power cables and PGND cables in the GBSR (2) SN 1 and 2; 3 and 4; 5 and 6; 7 and 8; 9 and 10; 11 and 12 13 14, 15, and 16; 17, 18, and 19 20, 21, and 22 23-30 Description Power cables for the BSC subracks PGND cable connecting the PDB and the busbar PGND cables connecting the busbars of different subracks PGND cables connecting the busbars of different cabinets PGND cables for the cabinet doors
7.2.3 Connections of Signal Cables in the GBSR

The signal cables in the GBSR consist of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-GTNU cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and PDB monitoring signal cable. Figure 7-7 shows the connections of the signal cables in the GBSR.
7-12
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7 GBSR Cabinet
Figure 7-7 Connections of the signal cables in the GBSR

16 4 9 8 5 13 14,15
1 13
GTCS
11 12
GTCS
2 7 6 3
MONITOR
15 14
GTCS
10 12
GTCS
6 7 8 9
MONITOR
GTCS
10 16 11
GTCS
MONITOR 1
2 3 4 5
Rear view
Front view
NOTE
Figure 7-7 shows the connections of the signal cables in a GBSR that is configured with three GTCSs. If the number of GTCSs to be configured is greater than three, another cabinet is required. The connections of signals cables for more than three GTCSs are the same. The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure 7-7 are examples. The actual types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables depend on the site plan. In Figure 7-7, the lowest GTCS serves as the main subrack and the GSCUs in the subracks are connected in the form of star topology. In practice, any GTCS can be used as the main subrack.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7-13
7 GBSR Cabinet
Table 7-6 describes the connections of the signal cables in the GBSR. Table 7-6 Signal cables in the GBSR SN 1 2 Description PDB monitoring signal cable Inter-GSCU Ethernet cable Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 DB15/port connecting the PDB to a service subrack RJ45/10/100/1000BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the main GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the main GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the main GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the main GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the main GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the main GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the main GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASE-T port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the main GTCS DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GTCS Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 DB15/MONITOR port on the lowest subrack RJ45/10/100/1000BASET port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASET port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASET port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASET port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASET port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASET port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASET port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 6 of the GTCS RJ45/10/100/1000BASET port on the GSCU that is installed in slot 7 of the GTCS DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GTCS
10
Inter-GTNU cable
7-14
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7 GBSR Cabinet
SN 11
Description Inter-GTNU cable
Connector Type/ Installation Position 1 DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GTCS DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GTCS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 14 or 15 of the GTCS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 14 or 15 of the GTCS DB44/E1/T1 port on the EIUa/PEUa that is installed in slot 14 or 15 of the GTCS LC optical port/RX/TX port on the OIUa that is installed in slot 27 of the GTCS
Connector Type/ Installation Position 2 DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GTCS DB14/TDM port on the GTNU that is installed in slot 4 or 5 of the GTCS DDF or other NEs
12
Inter-GTNU cable
13
E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs E1/T1 cable connecting the EIUa/PEUa to the DDF or other NEs Optical cable
14
DDF or other NEs
15
DDF or other NEs
16
OIUa of the GMPS/GEPS or ODF
7.3 Technical Specifications of the GBSR

The technical specifications of the GBSR consist of structural specifications and electrical specifications. Table 7-7 describes the structural specifications of the GBSR. Table 7-7 Structural specifications of the GBSR Specification Cabinet standard Dimensions Height available Weight Load-bearing capacity of the equipment room Value IEC60297 standard and IEEE standard 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth) 46 U Empty cabinet 100 kg; cabinet in full configuration 300 kg 450 kg/m2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
7-15
7 GBSR Cabinet
Table 7-8 describes the electrical specifications of the GBSR. Table 7-8 Electrical specifications of the GBSR Specification Rated input voltage Input voltage Value -48 V -40 V to -57 V
7-16
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
8
About This Chapter
BSC Subracks
This describes BSC subracks. BSC subracks are used to integrate boards and backplanes into an independent unit. BSC subracks are functionally classified into the GSM main processing subrack (GMPS), GSM extended processing subrack (GEPS), and GSM transcoder subrack (GTCS). 8.1 Components of the BSC Subrack This describes the components of the BSC subrack. The BSC subrack consists of the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane. 8.2 BSC Fan Box The fan box is used to dissipate the heat generated by the BSC. Each subrack must be configured with one fan box. 8.3 BSC Slots This describes the BSC slots. A backplane is positioned in the center of the BSC subrack. The BSC boards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane. 8.4 DIP Switches on the BSC Subrack This describes the DIP switch on the BSC subrack. The DIP switch on the BSC subrack is used to define the numbering of the BSC subrack. 8.5 Configuration of the BSC Subrack The BSC subracks are classified into the GMPS, GEPS, and GTCS. This describes the recommended configurations of these subracks in different application scenarios and combination modes. 8.6 Technical Specifications of the BSC Subrack The technical specifications of the BSC Subrack consist of the dimensions, height of the available space, weight of the subrack, and power consumption of the fully configured subrack.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-1
8 BSC Subracks
8.1 Components of the BSC Subrack

This describes the components of the BSC subrack. The BSC subrack consists of the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
Structure of the BSC Subrack

The BSC subrack is designed in compliance with IEC60297 standards. The BSC subrack is 19 inches wide and 12 U high. Figure 8-1 shows the structure of the BSC subrack.
8-2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
Figure 8-1 Structure of the BSC subrack
Front view
Rear view (1) Fan box (4) Front cable trough (2) Hanger (5) Board (3) Guide rail (6) Grounding screw
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-3
8 BSC Subracks

(7) Port for DC power input (8) Input port for the monitoring signals of the power (9) Cover of the DIP switch distribution box
Components
Table 8-1 lists the components of the BSC subrack. Table 8-1 Components of the BSC subrack Component Fan box Description For details, refer to 8.2.1 Fan Box (Configuration PFCU)or8.2.2 Fan Box (Configuration PFCB). For details, refer to 8.3 BSC Slots. The front cable trough is used to route the front cables of the subrack to both sides of the cabinet. The backplane is used to connect the boards in the same subrack.
Slots in the subrack Front cable trough Backplane
NOTE
For details on the settings of the DIP switches of the subrack, refer to 8.4 DIP Switches on the BSC Subrack.
8.2 BSC Fan Box

The fan box is used to dissipate the heat generated by the BSC. Each subrack must be configured with one fan box.
CAUTION
If you reassemble the fan box when the system is running, ensure that the operation lasts for less than three minutes. If your operation exceeds three minutes, excessive heat may lead to faults in the boards. 8.2.1 Fan Box (Configuration PFCU) This describes the appearance, LEDs, and technical specifications of the fan box that is configured with the PFCU. 8.2.2 Fan Box (Configuration PFCB) This describes the appearance, LEDs, and technical specifications of the fan box that is configured with the PFCB.
8 BSC Subracks
8.2.1 Fan Box (Configuration PFCU)

This describes the appearance, LEDs, and technical specifications of the fan box that is configured with the PFCU.
Appearance of the Fan Box(Configuration PFCU)

The fan box consists of the fans, boards, LED, and handle. Figure 8-2 shows the fan box. Figure 8-2 Fan box (Configuration PFCU)
(1) PFPU (4) LED
(2) Fan (5) Screw
(3) PFCU (6) Handle
NOTE
l l
The PFPU is inserted in the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans, keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, and ensures normal operation of the fans. The PFCU is the fan control unit. For details on the PFCU, refer to 9.28 PFCU.
LED on the Fan Box (Configuration PFCU)

The fan box uses a bi-color LED. Table 8-2 describes the LED on the fan box. Table 8-2 LED on the fan box (Configuration PFCU) Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s Meaning The fan box works normally (the fan box is registered).
8-5
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
Color
Status On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s
Meaning The fan box works normally (the fan box is not registered). The fan box is registered and has one of the following problems:
l
Red
On for 1s and off for 1s
One-way power supply to the subrack. Communication failure. Fan stops running or its speed is too low. Fan box in an excessively high temperature or temperature sensor failure.
l l
On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s
The fan box is not registered and has one of the following problems:
l
One-way power supply to the subrack. Fan stops running or its speed is too low. Fan box in an excessively high temperature or temperature sensor failure.
NOTE
The fan box is registered means that the fan box communicates with the BSC normally. The fan box is not registered means that the fan box does not communicate with the BSC normally.
Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configuration PFCU)

The technical specifications for the fan box consist of height, voltage, maximum power, temperature, and fan speed. Table 8-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box. Table 8-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (Configuration PFCU) Specification Height Input voltage Maximum power Temperature Value 1.5U (1 U = 44.45 mm) -60 V DC to -42 V DC 150 W -5C to +55C
8-6
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
Specification Fan speed
Value The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 50% to 100%.
NOTE
When the BSC is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC is upgraded, the fans in all the subracks run at full speed and the alarm LEDs on all the boards blink in a short period. These are normal symptoms during the BSC startup.
8.2.2 Fan Box (Configuration PFCB)

This describes the appearance, LEDs, and technical specifications of the fan box that is configured with the PFCB.
Appearance of the Fan Box (Configuration PFCB)

The fan box consists of the fans, boards, LED, and handle. Figure 8-3 shows the fan box. Figure 8-3 Fan box (Configuration PFCB)
5 4
3 4
(1) PFCB (4) Screw (2) Fan
1 5
(3) LED
(5) Handle
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-7
8 BSC Subracks
NOTE
The PFCB is the fan control board. For details on the PFCB, refer to 9.29 PFCB.
LED on the Fan Box (Configuration PFCB)

The fan box uses a bi-color LED. Table 8-4 describes the LED on the fan box. Table 8-4 LED on the fan box (Configuration PFCB) Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s Meaning The fan box is supplied with power in two ways without any fault (and is registered). The fan box is supplied with power in two ways without any fault (not registered). The fan box is registered and has one of the following problems:
l
On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s Red On for 1s and off for 1s
One-way power supply to the subrack. Communication failure. Fan stops running or its speed is too low. Fan box in an excessively high temperature or temperature sensor failure. Failure in speed regulation of fan box alarm.
l l
On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s
The fan box is not registered and has one of the following problems:
l
One-way power supply to the subrack. Fan stops running or its speed is too low. Fan box in an excessively high temperature or temperature sensor failure. Failure in speed regulation of fan box alarm.
NOTE
The fan box is registered means that the fan box communicates with the BSC normally. The fan box is not registered means that the fan box does not communicate with the BSC normally.
8-8
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configuration PFCB)

The technical specifications for the fan box consist of height, voltage, maximum power, temperature, and fan speed. Table 8-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan box. Table 8-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (Configuration PFCB) Specification Height Input voltage Maximum power Temperature Fan speed Value 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm) -40V DC to -57V DC 150 W -5C to +55C The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55% to 100%.
NOTE
When the BSC is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC is upgraded, the fans in all the subracks run at full speed and the alarm LEDs on all the boards blink in a short period. These are normal symptoms during the BSC startup.
8.3 BSC Slots

This describes the BSC slots. A backplane is positioned in the center of the BSC subrack. The BSC boards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane. Figure 8-4 shows the physical structure of the BSC subrack. The cubes shown in the figure indicate boards.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-9
8 BSC Subracks
Figure 8-4 Slot assignment in the BSC subrack

14 3 20 27
1 00 06 13
(1) Front board
(2) Backplane
(3) Rear board
NOTE
The backplane separates the BSC subrack into a front subrack and a rear subrack. The slots in the front subrack are numbered from 00 to 13 and the slots in the rear subrack are numbered from 14 to 27. The front subrack holds service boards and the rear subrack holds interface boards. In principle, each slot holds one board, but there are exceptions. Slots 20 and 21 hold one GOMU, and slots 22 and 23 hold one GOMU. Two neighboring even and odd slots, for example, slot 00 and slot 01, slot 02 and slot 03, work in active/standby mode. The boards working in active/standby mode occupy the active and standby slots.
8.4 DIP Switches on the BSC Subrack

This describes the DIP switch on the BSC subrack. The DIP switch on the BSC subrack is used to define the numbering of the BSC subrack.
Appearance
Figure 8-5 shows the DIP switches on the BSC subrack. Figure 8-5 DIP switch on the BSC subrack
ON
8-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
Meaning of the DIP Bits

The DIP bits are numbered in ascending order from bit 1 to bit 8. ON represents digit 0 and OFF represents digit 1. Table 8-6 provides the definitions of the bits. Table 8-6 Definitions of the DIP bits DIP Bit 1 (the least significant bit) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (the most significant bit) Meaning Subrack number setting bit Subrack number setting bit Subrack number setting bit Subrack number setting bit Subrack number setting bit Odd parity check bit Reserved, undefined, generally set to 0 (ON)
l l
For the GMPS, the bit should be set to 1 (OFF). For the GEPS and GTCS, the bit should be set to 0 (ON).
Bit 8 (the most significant bit) is used to set the startup mode of the GSCU in the subrack. The definitions of this bit are as follows:
l
If this bit is set to 0 (the status of the DIP bit is ON), the GSCU is set to Not Start Automatically. The startup of the GSCU depends on the GOMU. In other words, when the GSCU is started, it loads data from the GOMU. If this bit is set to 1 (the status of the DIP bit is OFF), the GSCU is set to Start Automatically. When the GSCU is started, it checks whether the Flash file is valid. If the Flash file is valid, the GSCU loads data from the Flash. If the Flash file is invalid, the GSCU loads data from the GOMU.
Setting Scheme
As the DIP switches use odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight DIP bits must be an odd number. The setting should adhere to the following principles: 1. 2. 3. Set DIP bits 1 through 5 and DIP bit 8. Set DIP bit 7 to 0. Count the number of 1s that have been set.
l l
If the number of 1s is even, set DIP bit 6 to 1. If the number of 1s is odd, set DIP bit 6 to 0.
Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 3. For the setting of the DIP switches in this case, refer to Table 8-7. Subrack 0 should be the GMPS. Subracks 1 to 3 may be the GEPS or the GTCS.
8 BSC Subracks
Table 8-7 Setting of the DIP switches Subr ack No. 0 DIP Bit 1 0 (ON) 1 1 (OFF) 2 0 (ON) 3 1 (OFF) 2 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 1 (OFF) 1 (OFF) 3 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 4 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 5 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 6 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 1 (OFF) 7 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 8 1 (OFF) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON)
8.5 Configuration of the BSC Subrack

The BSC subracks are classified into the GMPS, GEPS, and GTCS. This describes the recommended configurations of these subracks in different application scenarios and combination modes. 8.5.1 Configuration of the GMPS (Configuration Type A) The GMPS is configured in the GBCR. Each BSC must be configured with one GMPS. The GMPS processes the basic services of the BSC, performs operation and maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system. The configuration of the boards in the GMPS varies with the configuration modes of the BSC subracks. 8.5.2 Configuration of the GMPS (Configuration Type B) The GMPS is configured in the GBCR. Each BSC must be configured with one GMPS. The GMPS processes the basic services of the BSC, performs operation and maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system. The configuration of the boards in the GMPS varies with the configuration modes of the BSC subracks. 8.5.3 Configuration of the GEPS The GEPS is configured in the GBCR or GBSR. The BSC can be configured with zero to three GEPSs. The GEPS processes the basic services of the BSC. The configuration of the boards in the GEPS varies with the configuration modes of the BSC subracks. 8.5.4 Configuration of the GTCS In BM/TC separated configuration mode, the GTCS is configured in the GBCR or GBSR. The BSC can be configured with zero to four GTCSs. The GTCS performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing.
8.5.1 Configuration of the GMPS (Configuration Type A)

The GMPS is configured in the GBCR. Each BSC must be configured with one GMPS. The GMPS processes the basic services of the BSC, performs operation and maintenance, and
8 BSC Subracks
provides clock signals for the system. The configuration of the boards in the GMPS varies with the configuration modes of the BSC subracks.
BM/TC Separated (Built-In PCU)

In BM/TC separated (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, GDPUP, and GEPUG/GFGUG. The GDPUX, GXPUT, GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUT/GOIUT are optional boards. Figure 8-6 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-6 Fully configured GMPS (1)
14 G E P U G 15 G E P U G 16 G E I U T 17 G E I U T 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 27
Rear boards
Backplane G X P Front boards U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 10 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13
BM/TC Separated (External PCU)

In BM/TC separated (external PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, and GXPUM. The GXPUT, GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/ GOGUB, GEIUP/GOIUP, and GEIUT/GOIUT are optional boards. Figure 8-7 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-7 Fully configured GMPS (2)
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-13
8 BSC Subracks
BM/TC Combined (Built-In PCU)

In BM/TC combined (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, GDPUP, and GEPUG/GFGUG. The GXPUT, GEIUA/GOIUA, and GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB are optional boards. Figure 8-8 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-8 Fully configured GMPS (3)
14 G E P U G 15 G E P U G 16 G E I U A 17 G E I U A 18 G E I U A 19 G E I U A 20 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 G E I U B 27 G E I U B
Rear boards
Backplane G X P Front boards U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13
BM/TC Combined (External PCU)

In BM/TC combined (external PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, and GDPUX. The GXPUT, GEIUA/GOIUA, GEIUB/ GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUP/GOIUP are optional boards. Figure 8-9 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-9 Fully configured GMPS (4)
14 G E I U A 15 G E I U A 16 G E I U A 17 G E I U A 18 G E I U P 19 G E I U P 20 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 27
Rear boards
Backplane G X P Front boards U M 00 G X P U M 01 02 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U X 08 G D P U X 09 10 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13
8-14
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
A over IP (Built-In PCU)

In A over IP (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, GDPUP, GEPUG/GFGUG, and GFGUA/GOGUA. The GXPUT and GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB are optional boards. Figure 8-10 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-10 Fully configured GMPS (5)
14 G E P U G 15 G E P U G 16 G F G U A 17 G F G U A 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 21 22 23 24 G E H U B 25 G E H U B 26 27
Rear boards
Backplane G X P Front boards U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13
A over IP (External PCU)

In A over IP (external PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, and GFGUA/GOGUA. The GXPUT, GEIUB/GOIUB/ GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUP/GOIUP are optional boards. Figure 8-11 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-11 Fully configured GMPS (6)
14 G E I U P 15 G E I U P 16 G F G U A 17 G F G U A 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 27
Rear boards
Backplane G X P Front boards U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 08 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-15
8 BSC Subracks
CAUTION
l
The GDPUX inherits all the functions of the GDPUC. The GDPUX must be configured in any of the following conditions: in BM/TC combined configuration mode, in BM/TC separated configuration mode with the GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB configured, or in A over IP configuration mode. When the number of TRXs to be supported is greater than 256, a pair of GXPUTs must be configured in the GMPS. The A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces support E1/T1, FE/GE, and STM-1 transmissions. The Gb interface supports E1/T1 and FE/GE transmissions. The previous figures take E1/T1 transmission as examples, where the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUT/GEIUP/GEHUB/GEPUG is configured.
For details on the boards in the GMPS, refer to 9 BSC Boards.
8.5.2 Configuration of the GMPS (Configuration Type B)

The GMPS is configured in the GBCR. Each BSC must be configured with one GMPS. The GMPS processes the basic services of the BSC, performs operation and maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system. The configuration of the boards in the GMPS varies with the configuration modes of the BSC subracks.

In BM/TC separated (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GOMU, GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, GDPUP, and GEPUG/GFGUG. The GDPUX, GXPUT, GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUT/GOIUT are optional boards. Figure 8-12 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-12 Fully configured GMPS (1)
14 G E Rear boards P U G Backplane G X Front boards P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 10 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13 15 G E P U G 16 G E I U T 17 G E I U T 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 G O M U 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 27
8-16
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks

In BM/TC separated (external PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GOMU, GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, and GXPUM. The GXPUT, GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/ GFGUB/GOGUB, GEIUP/GOIUP, and GEIUT/GOIUT are optional boards. Figure 8-13 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-13 Fully configured GMPS (2)
14 G E Rear boards I U P Backplane G X P Front boards U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 08 09 10 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13 15 G E I U P 16 G E I U T 17 G E I U T 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 G O M U 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 G E I U B 27 G E I U B

In BM/TC combined (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GOMU, GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, GDPUP, and GEPUG/GFGUG. The GXPUT, GEIUA/GOIUA, and GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB are optional boards. Figure 8-14 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-14 Fully configured GMPS (3)
14 G E P U G 15 G E P U G 16 G E I U A 17 G E I U A 18 G E I U A 19 G E I U A 20 G O M U 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 G E I U B 27 G E I U B
Rear boards
Backplane G X P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13
Front boards
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-17
8 BSC Subracks

In BM/TC combined (external PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GOMU, GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, and GDPUX. The GXPUT, GEIUA/GOIUA, GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUP/GOIUP are optional boards. Figure 8-15 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-15 Fully configured GMPS (4)
14 G E I Rear boards U A Backplane G X P Front boards U M 00 G X P U M 01 02 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U X 08 G D P U X 09 10 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13 15 G E I U A 16 G E I U A 17 G E I U A 18 G E I U P 19 G E I U P 20 G O M U 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 27

In A over IP (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GOMU, GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, GDPUP, GEPUG/GFGUG, and GFGUA/GOGUA. The GXPUT and GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB are optional boards. Figure 8-16 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-16 Fully configured GMPS (5)
14 G E P Rear boards U G Backplane G X P Front boards U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13 15 G E P U G 16 G F G U A 17 G F G U A 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 G O M U 21 22 23 24 G E H U B 25 G E H U B 26 27
8-18
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks

In A over IP (external PCU) configuration mode, the GMPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GGCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, and GFGUA/GOGUA. The GXPUT, GEIUB/GOIUB/ GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUP/GOIUP are optional boards. Figure 8-17 shows the fully configured GMPS. Figure 8-17 Fully configured GMPS (6)
14 G E Rear boards I U P Backplane G X Front boards P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 08 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 G G C U 12 G G C U 13 15 G E I U P 16 G F G U A 17 G F G U A 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 G O M U 21 22 23 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 27
CAUTION
l
The GDPUX inherits all the functions of the GDPUC. The GDPUX must be configured in any of the following conditions: in BM/TC combined configuration mode, in BM/TC separated configuration mode with the GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB configured, or in A over IP configuration mode. When the number of TRXs to be supported is greater than 256, a pair of GXPUTs must be configured in the GMPS. The A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces support E1/T1, FE/GE, and STM-1 transmissions. The Gb interface supports E1/T1 and FE/GE transmissions. The previous figures take E1/T1 transmission as examples, where the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUT/GEIUP/GEHUB/GEPUG is configured.
For details on the boards in the GMPS, refer to 9 BSC Boards.
8.5.3 Configuration of the GEPS

The GEPS is configured in the GBCR or GBSR. The BSC can be configured with zero to three GEPSs. The GEPS processes the basic services of the BSC. The configuration of the boards in the GEPS varies with the configuration modes of the BSC subracks.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-19
8 BSC Subracks

In BM/TC separated (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GEPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GXPUM, GDPUP, and GEPUG/GFGUG. The GDPUX, GXPUT, GEIUB/ GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUT/GOIUT are optional boards. Figure 8-18 shows the fully configured GEPS. Figure 8-18 Fully configured GEPS (1)
14 15 16 G E I U T 17 G E I U T 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 G E I U B 21 G E I U B 22 G E I U B 23 G E I U B 24 25 26 27
Rear boards
Backplane G X P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 G D P U P 10 11 12 13
Front boards

In BM/TC separated (external PCU) configuration mode, the GEPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, and GXPUM. The GXPUT, GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, GEIUP/GOIUP, and GEIUT/GOIUT are optional boards. Figure 8-19 shows the fully configured GEPS. Figure 8-19 Fully configured GEPS (2)
14 G E I U P 15 G E I U P 16 G E I U T 17 G E I U T 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 G E I U B 21 G E I U B 22 G E I U B 23 G E I U B 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 G E I U B 27 G E I U B
Rear boards
Backplane G X P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
Front boards
8-20
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks

In BM/TC combined (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GEPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, GDPUP, and GEPUG/GFGUG. The GXPUT, GEIUA/ GOIUA, and GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB are optional boards. Figure 8-20 shows the fully configured GEPS. Figure 8-20 Fully configured GEPS (3)
14 G E I U A 15 G E I U A 16 G E I U A 17 G E I U A 18 G E I U A 19 G E I U A 20 G E I U B 21 G E I U B 22 G E I U B 23 G E I U B 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 G D P U X 27 G D P U X
Rear boards
Backplane G X P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 G D P U P 10 G D P U X 11 G D P U X 12 G D P U X 13
Front boards

In BM/TC combined (external PCU) configuration mode, the GEPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GXPUM, and GDPUX. The GXPUT, GEIUA/GOIUA, GEIUB/GOIUB/ GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUP/GOIUP are optional boards. Figure 8-21 shows the fully configured GEPS. Figure 8-21 Fully configured GEPS (4)
14 G Rear boards E I U A Backplane G X Front boards P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U X 08 G D P U X 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 12 13 15 G E I U A 16 G E I U A 17 G E I U A 18 G E I U A 19 G E I U A 20 G E I U P 21 G E I U P 22 G E I U B 23 G E I U B 24 G E I U B 25 G E I U B 26 G E I U A 27 G E I U A
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-21
8 BSC Subracks

In A over IP (built-in PCU) configuration mode, the GEPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, GDPUP, GEPUG/GFGUG, and GFGUA/GOGUA. The GXPUT and GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB are optional boards. Figure 8-22 shows the fully configured GEPS. Figure 8-22 Fully configured GEPS (5)
14 15 16 G F G U A 17 G F G U A 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 G E I U B 21 G E I U B 22 G E H U B 23 G E H U B 24 25 26 27
Rear boards
Backplane G X P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U P 08 G D P U P 09 G D P U P 10 G D P U X 11 G D P U X 12 G D P U X 13
Front boards

In A over IP (external PCU) configuration mode, the GEPS must be configured with the GTNU, GSCU, GXPUM, GDPUX, and GFGUA/GOGUA. The GXPUT, GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB/ GFGUB/GOGUB, and GEIUP/GOIUP are optional boards. Figure 8-23 shows the fully configured GEPS. Figure 8-23 Fully configured GEPS (6)
14 G E I U P 15 G E I U P 16 G F G U A 17 G F G U A 18 G E I U B 19 G E I U B 20 G E I U B 21 G E I U B 22 G E I U B 23 G E I U B 24 25 26 27
Rear boards
Backplane G X P U M 00 G X P U M 01 G X P U T 02 G X P U T 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U X 08 G D P U X 09 G D P U X 10 11 12 13
Front boards
8-22
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
CAUTION
l
The GDPUX inherits all the functions of the GDPUC. The GDPUX must be configured in any of the following conditions: in BM/TC combined configuration mode, in BM/TC separated configuration mode with the GEHUB/GFGUB/GOGUB configured, or in A over IP configuration mode. When the number of TRXs to be supported is greater than 256, a pair of GXPUTs must be configured in the GEPS. The A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces support E1/T1, FE/GE, and STM-1 transmissions. The Gb interface supports E1/T1 and FE/GE transmissions. The previous figures take E1/T1 transmission as examples, where the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUT/GEIUP/GEHUB/GEPUG is configured.
For details on the boards in the GEPS, refer to 9 BSC Boards.
8.5.4 Configuration of the GTCS

In BM/TC separated configuration mode, the GTCS is configured in the GBCR or GBSR. The BSC can be configured with zero to four GTCSs. The GTCS performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing. The GTCS must be configured with the GSCU and GTNU. The GDPUX, GEIUA/GOIUA, and GEIUT/GOIUT are optional boards. When the E1/T1 transmission is used on the A interface, one GTCS supports a maximum of 4,800 speech paths. Figure 8-24 shows the fully configured GTCS. Figure 8-24 Fully configured GTCS (1)
14 G E I U T 15 G E I U T 16 G E I U T 17 G E I U T 18 G E I U A 19 G E I U A 20 G E I U A 21 G E I U A 22 G E I U A 23 G E I U A 24 G E I U A 25 G E I U A 26 G E I U A 27 G E I U A
Rear boards
Backplane G T N U 00 01 02 03 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 08 G D P U X 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 G D P U X 12 G D P U X 13
Front boards
When the STM-1 transmission is used on the A interface, one GTCS supports a maximum of 9,600 speech paths. Figure 8-25 shows the fully configured GTCS.
8 BSC Subracks
Figure 8-25 Fully configured GTCS (2)

14 G O I U T 15 G O I U T 16 G O I U T 17 G O I U T 18 G O I U A 19 G O I U A 20 G O I U A 21 G O I U A 22 G O I U A 23 G O I U A 24 G O I U A 25 G O I U A 26 G O I U A 27 G O I U A
Rear boards
Backplane G D P U X 00 G D P U X 01 G D P U X 02 G D P U X 03 G T N U 04 G T N U 05 G S C U 06 G S C U 07 G D P U X 08 G D P U X 09 G D P U X 10 G D P U X 11 G D P U X 12 G D P U X 13
Front boards
CAUTION
l
The GDPUX inherits all the functions of the GDPUC. The GTCS can be configured with the GDPUX, GDPUC, or both GDPUX and GDPUC.
For details on the boards in the GTCS, refer to BSC Boards.
8.6 Technical Specifications of the BSC Subrack

The technical specifications of the BSC Subrack consist of the dimensions, height of the available space, weight of the subrack, and power consumption of the fully configured subrack.
Technical Specifications of the GMPS

Table 8-8 lists the technical specifications of the GMPS. Table 8-8 Technical specifications of the GMPS Specification Dimensions Height of the available space in the subrack Weight Power consumption of the fully configured subrack Value 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth) 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inch) Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards: 57 kg 780 W
8-24
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8 BSC Subracks
Technical Specifications of the GEPS

Table 8-9 lists the technical specifications of the GEPS. Table 8-9 Technical specifications of the GEPS Specification Dimensions Height of the available space Weight Power consumption of the fully configured subrack Value 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth) 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches) Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards: 57 kg 600 W
Technical Specifications of the GTCS

Table 8-10 lists the technical specifications of the GTCS. Table 8-10 Technical specifications of the GTCS Specification Dimensions Height of the available space in the subrack Weight Power consumption of the fully configured subrack Value 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth) 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches) Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards: 57 kg When E1/T1 transmission is used on the A interface, the maximum power consumption is 700 W. When STM-1 transmission is used on the A interface, the maximum power consumption is 970 W.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
8-25
9 BSC Boards
9
About This Chapter
This describes the boards in the BSC. Table 9-1 Boards in the BSC Physical Board OMUb GCUa SCUa TNUa XPUa Logical Board GOMU GGCU GSCU GTNU GXPUM GXPUT GXPUI EIUa GEIUB GEIUP GEIUT GEIUA OIUa GOIUB
BSC Boards
The logical boards are formed by loading different software to the physical boards. Table 9-1 lists the boards in the BSC.
Full Spelling of Logical Board GSM Operation and Maintenance Unit GSM General Clock Unit GSM Switching and Control Unit GSM TDM switching Network Unit GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Main service GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Transmission GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Computation service GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for aBis GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for Pb GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for aTer GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for A GSM Optic Interface Unit for aBis
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-1
9 BSC Boards
Physical Board
Logical Board GOIUP GOIUT GOIUA
Full Spelling of Logical Board GSM Optic Interface Unit for Pb GSM Optic Interface Unit for aTer GSM Optic Interface Unit for A GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for A GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for aBis GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for Gb GSM Optic Gigabit ethernet Unit for A GSM Optic Gigabit ethernet Unit for aBis GSM E1/T1 High level Data Link Control Unit for aBis GSM E1/T1 Packet Unit for Gb GSM Data Processing Unit for eXtensible service GSM Data Processing Unit for PS service GSM Data Processing Unit for CS service Fan Power Unit Fan Control Unit Fan Control Board Distribution Monitor and Communication board Overvoltage Protection Board
FG2a
GFGUA GFGUB GFGUG
GOUa
GOGUA GOGUB
PEUa
GEHUB GEPUG
DPUc DPUd DPUa -
GDPUX GDPUP GDPUC PFPU PFCU PFCB MDMC WOPB
9.1 GEIUA The GEIUA is the GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for the A interface. It can be installed in slots 18-25 in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS. The GEIUA can be configured in pairs and work in active/ standby mode. 9.2 GEIUB The GEIUB is the GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GEIUB can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode.
9 BSC Boards
9.3 GEIUP The GEIUP is the GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for the Pb interface. It can be installed in slots 14-15 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GEIUP can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.4 GEIUT The GEIUT is the GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for the Ater interface. It can be installed in slots 16-17 in the GMPS/GEPS and in slots 14-17 in the GTCS. The GEIUT can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.5 GGCU The GGCU is the general clock unit of the BSC. Two GGCUs should be installed in slots 12-13 in the GMPS and should work in active/standby mode. 9.6 GOIUA The GOIUA is the GSM Optic Interface Unit for the A interface. It can be installed in slots 18-25 in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS. The GOIUA can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.7 GOIUB The GOIUB is the GSM Optic Interface Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GOIUB can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.8 GOIUP The GOIUP is the GSM Optic Interface Unit for the Pb interface. It can be installed in slots 14-15 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GOIUP can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.9 GOIUT The GOIUT is the GSM Optic Interface Unit for the Ater interface. It can be installed in slots 16-17 in the GMPS/GEPS and in slots 14-17 in the GTCS. The GOIUT can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.10 GOMU This describes the GSM Operation and Maintenance Unit (GOMU). It serves as the server in the BSC and works in active/standby mode. It can be installed in either slots 20-23 or slots 25 and 27 in the GMPS. 9.11 GSCU The GSCU is the GSM Switching and Control Unit. It is installed in slots 6-7 in the GMPS/ GEPS/GTCS. The GSCU is configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.12 GTNU The GTNU is the GSM TDM switching network unit in the BSC. It is installed in slots 4-5 in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS. The GTNU is configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.13 GXPUM The GXPUM is the GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Main service in the BSC. It can be installed in slots 0-1 in the GMPS/GEPS and work in active/standby mode. 9.14 GXPUT The GXPUT is the GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Transmission in the BSC and processes signals according to the LAPD protocol and SS7 MTP3 protocol. When the number of TRXs to be supported by the GMPS/GEPS is greater than 256, the GXPUT can be installed in slots 2-3 in the GMPS/GEPS and work in active/standby mode. 9.15 GXPUI
9 BSC Boards
The GXPUI is the GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Computation service in the BSC and implements the IBCA algorithm. It can be configured in slots 2-3 in the GMPS/GEPS and does not work in active/standby mode. 9.16 GFGUA The GFGUA is the GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for the A interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. If the BSC need not process packet services, the GFGUA can be installed in slots 14-15. The GFGUA can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.17 GFGUB The GFGUB is the GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. If the BSC need not process packet services, the GFGUB can be installed in slots 14-15. The GFGUB can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.18 GFGUG The GFGUG is the GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for the Gb interface. It can be installed in slots 14-15 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GFGUG can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.19 GOGUA The GOGUA is the GSM Optic Gigabit ethernet Unit for the A interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. When the BSC need not process packet services, the GOGUA can also be installed in slots 14-15. The GOGUA can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.20 GOGUB The GOGUB is the GSM Optic Gigabit ethernet Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. When the BSC need not process packet services, the GOGUB can also be installed in slots 14-15. The GOGUB can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.21 GEHUB The GEHUB is the GSM E1/T1 High level Data Link Control Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. When the BSC need not process packet services, the GEHUB can also be installed in slots 14-15. The GEHUB can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.22 GEPUG The GEPUG is the GSM E1/T1 Packet Unit for the Gb interface. It can be installed in slots 14-15 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GEPUG can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.23 GDPUC The GDPUC is the CS service processing unit in the BSC. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the GTCS, the GDPUC can be installed in slots 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installed in the GTCS, the GDPUC can be installed in slots 1 to 3 and slots 8 to 13. 9.24 GDPUX The GDPUX is the GSM Data Processing Unit for eXtensible services. It can be installed in slots 8-11 in the GMPS; slots 0-3, 8-13, and 14-27 in the GEPS; and slots 0-3, 8-13 in the GTCS. 9.25 GDPUP The GDPUP is the GSM Data Processing Unit for PS services. It can be installed in slots 8-13 in the GMPS/GEPS. 9.26 MDMC
9 BSC Boards
The MDMC is the power monitoring communication board for the BSC common power distribution box. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the GBCR/GBSR. Each power distribution box should be configured with one MDMC. 9.27 PAMU The PAMU is the power monitoring communication board for the BSC high-power distribution box. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the GBCR/GBSR. Each power distribution box should be configured with one PAMU. 9.28 PFCU The PFCU is the fan control unit. It is installed in the front of a fan box. Each fan box must be configured with one PFCU. 9.29 PFCB The PFCB is the fan control board. It is installed in the front of a fan box. Each fan box must be configured with one PFCB. 9.30 WOPB The WOPB is the overvoltage protection board in the BSC. It is placed in the power distribution box. Each Common power distribution box should be configured with one WOPB.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-5
9 BSC Boards
9.1 GEIUA
The GEIUA is the GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for the A interface. It can be installed in slots 18-25 in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS. The GEIUA can be configured in pairs and work in active/ standby mode. 9.1.1 Functions of the GEIUA The GEIUA enables the E1/T1 transmission on the A interface. 9.1.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.1.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.1.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the seven ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, one 2M1, and one TESTOUT. 9.1.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
9.1.1 Functions of the GEIUA

The GEIUA enables the E1/T1 transmission on the A interface. The GEIUA performs the following functions:
l l
Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports, which is used for TDM transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards. Transmits and receives 32 E1/T1 signals, and encodes and decodes the E1/T1 signals (The E1 transmission rate is 2.048 Mbit/s and the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.)
9.1.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-1 shows the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel.
9-6
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-1 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel

EIUa
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
9.1.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel

The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-2 describes the LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel. Table 9-2 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty.
9-7
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
TESTOUT 2M1 2M0
E1/T1(0~7)
E1/T1(8~15)
E1/T1(16~23)
E1/T1(24~31)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
Meaning There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
9.1.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the seven ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, one 2M1, and one TESTOUT. Table 9-3 describes the ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel. Table 9-3 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel Port E1/T1 (0-7) Function E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 0-7 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 8-15 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 16-23 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 24-31 Output ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signals, used to export the extracted line clock for system reference You can modify the register value to obtain different test clock signals. By default, the 2.048 MHz clock signals are the outputs from this port.
Port DB44
E1/T1 (8-15)
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23)
DB44
E1/T1 (24-31)
DB44
2M0 and 2M1
SMB male connector
TESTOUT
SMB male connector
9-8
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.1.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)

The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6. Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT. Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT
1 S6 1 S5 1 S4 1 S3
ON OFF
1 S1
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
(1) Sub-board
(2) Bottom plate
CAUTION
All the DIP switches are located on the front side of the sub-board. The front of the sub-board faces and fits into the bottom plate. Therefore, you should remove the sub-board before setting the DIP switches. Table 9-4 describes the DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT.
9 BSC Boards
Table 9-4 DIP switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT DIP Swit ch DIP Bit Description Setting for 75ohm Coaxial Cable Value of DIP Bit for 75ohm Coaxial Cable Setting for 120ohm Twisted Pair Cable Value of DIP Bit for 120ohm Twiste d Pair Cable 1
S1
Used to select the impedance on E1/T1 links 0-7 Used to select the impedance on E1/T1 links 8-15 Used to select the impedance on E1/T1 links 16-23 Used to select the impedance on E1/T1 links 24-31 Reserved Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 0-7 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 8-15 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 16-23 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 24-31
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1-4 S3 1-8
ON
OFF
S4
1-8
ON
OFF
S5
1-8
ON
OFF
S6
1-8
ON
OFF
Table 9-5 describes different switches listed in Table 9-4.
9-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Table 9-5 Switch types related to the DIP bits DIP Switch E1/T1 impedance selection switch Description Used to select the logical transmission mode of the board and to notify the software of the current transmission mode
Switch used to set the protection Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end grounding of the E1/T1 transmitting of the E1/T1 signals: end l When E1/T1 signals are transmitted through a 75ohm coaxial cable in unbalanced transmission mode, set the DIP bit to ON and ground the TX end.
l
When E1/T1 signals are transmitted through a 120ohm coaxial cable in balanced transmission mode, set the DIP bit to OFF and ground the TX end.
NOTE
l l l l
By default, the DIP switches are set in 75-ohm coaxial transmission mode. The setting for the DIP switches on the active EIUa board must be the same as that for the DIP switches on the standby EIUa board. The receiving ends should not be grounded in either balanced or unbalanced modes. Pay attention to the mapping between the two types of DIP switches.
9.2 GEIUB
The GEIUB is the GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GEIUB can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.2.1 Functions of the GEIUB The GEIUB enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Abis interface. 9.2.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.2.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.2.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the seven ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, one 2M1, and one TESTOUT. 9.2.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)
9 BSC Boards
The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
9.2.1 Functions of the GEIUB

The GEIUB enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Abis interface. The GEIUB performs the following functions:
l l
Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports, which is used for TDM transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards. Transmits and receives 32 E1/T1 signals, and encodes and decodes the E1/T1 signals (The E1 transmission rate is 2.048 Mbit/s and the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.)

9-12
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

EIUa
RUN ALM ACT
PARC

9-13
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
TESTOUT 2M1 2M0
E1/T1(0~7)
E1/T1(8~15)
E1/T1(16~23)
E1/T1(24~31)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off

Port DB44
E1/T1 (8-15)
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23)
DB44
E1/T1 (24-31)
DB44
2M0 and 2M1
SMB male connector
TESTOUT
SMB male connector
9-14
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

1 S6 1 S5 1 S4 1 S3
ON OFF
1 S1
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
(1) Sub-board
(2) Bottom plate
CAUTION
9 BSC Boards
S1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1-4 S3 1-8
ON
OFF
S4
1-8
ON
OFF
S5
1-8
ON
OFF
S6
1-8
ON
OFF
9-16
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
l
NOTE
l l l l
9.3 GEIUP
The GEIUP is the GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for the Pb interface. It can be installed in slots 14-15 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GEIUP can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.3.1 Functions of the GEIUP The GEIUP enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Pb interface. 9.3.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.3.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.3.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the seven ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, one 2M1, and one TESTOUT. 9.3.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)
9 BSC Boards
9.3.1 Functions of the GEIUP

The GEIUP enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Pb interface. The GEIUP performs the following functions:
l l
Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports, which is used for TDM transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards. Transmits and receives 32 E1/T1 signals, and encodes and decodes the E1/T1 signals (The E1 transmission rate is 2.048 Mbit/s and the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.) Processes signals according to the Link Access Procedure on the D channel (LAPD) protocol

9-18
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

EIUa
RUN ALM ACT
PARC

9-19
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
TESTOUT 2M1 2M0
E1/T1(0~7)
E1/T1(8~15)
E1/T1(16~23)
E1/T1(24~31)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off

Port DB44
E1/T1 (8-15)
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23)
DB44
E1/T1 (24-31)
DB44
2M0 and 2M1
SMB male connector
TESTOUT
SMB male connector
9-20
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

1 S6 1 S5 1 S4 1 S3
ON OFF
1 S1
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
(1) Sub-board
(2) Bottom plate
CAUTION
9 BSC Boards
S1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1-4 S3 1-8
ON
OFF
S4
1-8
ON
OFF
S5
1-8
ON
OFF
S6
1-8
ON
OFF
9-22
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
l
NOTE
l l l l
9.4 GEIUT
The GEIUT is the GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for the Ater interface. It can be installed in slots 16-17 in the GMPS/GEPS and in slots 14-17 in the GTCS. The GEIUT can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.4.1 Functions of the GEIUT The GEIUT enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Ater interface. 9.4.2 GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.4.3 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.4.4 Ports on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the seven ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, one 2M1, and one TESTOUT. 9.4.5 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)
9 BSC Boards
9.4.1 Functions of the GEIUT

The GEIUT enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Ater interface. The GEIUT performs the following functions:
l l
Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports, which is used for TDM transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards. Transmits and receives 32 E1/T1 signals, and encodes and decodes the E1/T1 signals (The E1 transmission rate is 2.048 Mbit/s and the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.) Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol Provides the OM links when the GTCS is configured on the MSC side
l l

9-24
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

EIUa
RUN ALM ACT
PARC

9-25
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
TESTOUT 2M1 2M0
E1/T1(0~7)
E1/T1(8~15)
E1/T1(16~23)
E1/T1(24~31)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off

Port DB44
E1/T1 (8-15)
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23)
DB44
E1/T1 (24-31)
DB44
2M0 and 2M1
SMB male connector
TESTOUT
SMB male connector
9-26
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

1 S6 1 S5 1 S4 1 S3
ON OFF
1 S1
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
(1) Sub-board
(2) Bottom plate
CAUTION
9 BSC Boards
S1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1-4 S3 1-8
ON
OFF
S4
1-8
ON
OFF
S5
1-8
ON
OFF
S6
1-8
ON
OFF
9-28
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
l
NOTE
l l l l
9.5 GGCU
The GGCU is the general clock unit of the BSC. Two GGCUs should be installed in slots 12-13 in the GMPS and should work in active/standby mode. 9.5.1 Functions of the GGCU The GGCU provides synchronization clocks for the BSC. 9.5.2 GGCU Panel The components on the GGCU panel are the LEDs and ports. 9.5.3 LEDs on the GGCU Panel There are three LEDs on the GGCU panel: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.5.4 Ports on the GGCU Panel The GGCU panel provides sixteen ports, of which ten ports are labeled CLKOUT, two COM, one TESTOUT, one TESTIN, and two CLKIN.
9.5.1 Functions of the GGCU

The GGCU provides synchronization clocks for the BSC. The GGCU performs the following functions:
l
The GGCU traces, generates, and retains the synchronous clock signals.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
l
The standby GGCU traces the clock phase of the active GGCU. It also ensures that the clock phase is smooth when an active/standby switchover occurs.
9.5.2 GGCU Panel

The components on the GGCU panel are the LEDs and ports. Figure 9-9 shows the GGCU panel. Figure 9-9 GGCU panel
GCUa
RUN ALM ACT
0 1 2 3
CLKOUT CLKLIN1CLKLIN0 TESTIN TESTOUT
4 5 6 7 8 9
COM1 COM0
PARC
9.5.3 LEDs on the GGCU Panel

There are three LEDs on the GGCU panel: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-18 describes the three LEDs on the GGCU panel.
9-30
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Table 9-18 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
9.5.4 Ports on the GGCU Panel

The GGCU panel provides sixteen ports, of which ten ports are labeled CLKOUT, two COM, one TESTOUT, one TESTIN, and two CLKIN. Table 9-19 describes the ports on the GGCU panel. Table 9-19 Ports on the GGCU panel Port CLKOUT 0 to CLKOUT 9 Function Synchronization clock output port, used to provide the 8 kHz clock signals to the CLKIN port on the GSCU panel Reserved Reserved Input port for testing external clock signals Synchronization clock input port, used to receive the 2.048 MHz clock signals or 2.048 Mbit/s code stream signals Port RJ45
COM0 and COM1 TESTOUT TESTIN CLKLIN0 and CLKLIN1
RJ45 SMB male connector SMB male connector SMB male connector
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-31
9 BSC Boards
9.6 GOIUA
The GOIUA is the GSM Optic Interface Unit for the A interface. It can be installed in slots 18-25 in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS. The GOIUA can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.6.1 Functions of the GOIUA The GOIUA enables the STM-1 transmission on the A interface. 9.6.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.6.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. There are four LEDs on the panel of each of these boards: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. 9.6.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel This describes the panel of the optical interface boards. The GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP, and GOIUT use the same physical board but perform different logical functions by loading different software. These boards have the same ports. Of the four ports, one port is labeled RX/TX, one 2MO, one 2M1, and one TESTOUT. 9.6.5 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) The technical specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT consist of the optical port mode, optical port type, wavelength, transmission rate, transmission distance, output power, and receiver sensitivity.
9.6.1 Functions of the GOIUA

The GOIUA enables the STM-1 transmission on the A interface. The GOIUA performs the following functions:
l l
Provides one STM-1 port, which is used for TDM transmission Provides Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function to enable switchover between the optical channel links of the active and standby boards. Provides one channelized STM-1 port with the data rate of 155.52 Mbit/s
9.6.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-10 shows the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel.
9-32
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-10 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel

OIUa
RUN ALM ACT
RX TX
LOS
PARC
9.6.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. There are four LEDs on the panel of each of these boards: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. Table 9-20 describes the LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel. Table 9-20 LEDs on the board LED RUN Colo r Gree n Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
TESTOUT 2M1
2M0
9-33
9 BSC Boards
LED
Colo r
Status On Off
Meaning There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode. The STM-1 port does not receive signals properly. The STM-1 port receives signals properly.
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Gree n Gree n
On Off On Off
LOS
9.6.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel

This describes the panel of the optical interface boards. The GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP, and GOIUT use the same physical board but perform different logical functions by loading different software. These boards have the same ports. Of the four ports, one port is labeled RX/TX, one 2MO, one 2M1, and one TESTOUT. Table 9-21 describes the ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel. Table 9-21 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT panel Port RX TX 2M0 and 2M1 TESTO UT Function TX indicates the transmitting optical port and RX indicates the receiving optical port. Output ports for the 2.048 MHz clock reference, used to export the extracted line clock and take it as the reference clock for the system You can modify the register value to obtain different test clock signals. By default, the 2.048 MHz clock signals are generated from this port and taken as the system test clock. Port LC port
SMB male connector SMB male connector
9-34
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.6.5 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/ GOIUT(OIUa)

The technical specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT consist of the optical port mode, optical port type, wavelength, transmission rate, transmission distance, output power, and receiver sensitivity. Table 9-22 lists the technical specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT. Table 9-22 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT Specification Optical port mode Optical port type Central wavelength Transmission rate Transmission distance Maximum output optical power Minimum output optical power Maximum receiver sensitivity Value Single mode LC/PC 1,310 nm 155.52 Mbit/s 15 km -8 dBm -15 dBm -31 dBm Multimode LC/PC 1,310 nm 155.52 Mbit/s 2 km -14 dBm -19 dBm -30 dBm
9.7 GOIUB
The GOIUB is the GSM Optic Interface Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GOIUB can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.7.1 Functions of the GOIUB The GOIUB enables the STM-1 transmission on the Abis interface. 9.7.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.7.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. There are four LEDs on the panel of each of these boards: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. 9.7.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel This describes the panel of the optical interface boards. The GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP, and GOIUT use the same physical board but perform different logical functions by loading different
9 BSC Boards
software. These boards have the same ports. Of the four ports, one port is labeled RX/TX, one 2MO, one 2M1, and one TESTOUT. 9.7.5 Technical Specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) The technical specifications of the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT consist of the optical port mode, optical port type, wavelength, transmission rate, transmission distance, output power, and receiver sensitivity.
9.7.1 Functions of the GOIUB

The GOIUB enables the STM-1 transmission on the Abis interface. The GOIUB performs the following functions:
l l
Provides one STM-1 port, which is used for TDM transmission Provides Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function to enable switchover between the optical channel links of the active and standby boards. Provides one channelized STM-1 port with the data rate of 155.52 Mbit/s

9-36
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

OIUa
RUN ALM ACT
RX TX
LOS
PARC

Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
TESTOUT 2M1
2M0
9-37
9 BSC Boards
LED
Colo r
Status On Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Gree n Gree n
On Off On Off
LOS

9-38
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

9.8 GOIUP
The GOIUP is the GSM Optic Interface Unit for the Pb interface. It can be installed in slots 14-15 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GOIUP can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.8.1 Functions of the GOIUP The GOIUP enables the STM-1 transmission on the Pb interface. 9.8.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.8.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. There are four LEDs on the panel of each of these boards: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. 9.8.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel This describes the panel of the optical interface boards. The GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP, and GOIUT use the same physical board but perform different logical functions by loading different
9 BSC Boards
9.8.1 Functions of the GOIUP

The GOIUP enables the STM-1 transmission on the Pb interface. The GOIUP performs the following functions:
l l
Provides one STM-1 port, which is used for TDM transmission Provides Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function to enable switchover between the optical channel links of the active and standby boards. Provides one channelized STM-1 port with the data rate of 155.52 Mbit/s Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol
l l

9-40
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

OIUa
RUN ALM ACT
RX TX
LOS
PARC

Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
TESTOUT 2M1
2M0
9-41
9 BSC Boards
LED
Colo r
Status On Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Gree n Gree n
On Off On Off
LOS

9-42
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

9.9 GOIUT
The GOIUT is the GSM Optic Interface Unit for the Ater interface. It can be installed in slots 16-17 in the GMPS/GEPS and in slots 14-17 in the GTCS. The GOIUT can be configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.9.1 Functions of the GOIUT The GOIUT enables the STM-1 transmission on the Ater interface. 9.9.2 GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.9.3 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. There are four LEDs on the panel of each of these boards: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. 9.9.4 Ports on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel This describes the panel of the optical interface boards. The GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP, and GOIUT use the same physical board but perform different logical functions by loading different
9 BSC Boards
9.9.1 Functions of the GOIUT

The GOIUT enables the STM-1 transmission on the Ater interface. The GOIUT performs the following functions:
l l
Provides one STM-1 port, which is used for TDM transmission Provides Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function to enable switchover between the optical channel links of the active and standby boards. Provides one channelized STM-1 port with the data rate of 155.52 Mbit/s Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol Provides the OM links when the GTCS is configured on the MSC side
l l l

9-44
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

OIUa
RUN ALM ACT
RX TX
LOS
PARC

Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
TESTOUT 2M1
2M0
9-45
9 BSC Boards
LED
Colo r
Status On Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Gree n Gree n
On Off On Off
LOS

9-46
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

9.10 GOMU
This describes the GSM Operation and Maintenance Unit (GOMU). It serves as the server in the BSC and works in active/standby mode. It can be installed in either slots 20-23 or slots 25 and 27 in the GMPS. 9.10.1 Functions of the GOMU As the OM center of the BSC, the GOMU enables the communication between the LMT and the other boards in the BSC. The GOMU features high computation speed and outstanding data processing capability. 9.10.2 GOMU Panel The components on the GOMU panel are the LEDs and ports. 9.10.3 LEDs on the GOMU Panel There are five LEDs on the GOMU panel: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD. 9.10.4 Ports on the GOMU Panel The ports on the GOMU panel consist of four USB ports (labeled USB0-1 and USB2-3), three GE ports (labeled ETH0, ETH1, and ETH2), one serial port COM-ALM/COM-BMC, and one VGA port.
9 BSC Boards
9.10.1 Functions of the GOMU

As the OM center of the BSC, the GOMU enables the communication between the LMT and the other boards in the BSC. The GOMU features high computation speed and outstanding data processing capability. The GOMU performs the following functions:
l
Controls the communication between the LMT computer and the other boards in the BSC, facilitates the data configuration, and collects and filters the performance and alarm data Processes the commands issued by the LMT computer/M2000, and then forwards the commands to the other boards in the BSC for processing Filters the results from the other boards in the BSC, and then returns the results to the LMT computer
9.10.2 GOMU Panel

The components on the GOMU panel are the LEDs and ports. Figure 9-14 shows the GOMU panel. Figure 9-14 GOMU panel
1
OMUb
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18
(1) Screw
(2) Wrench
(3) Self-locking latch
9-48
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)

(4) RUN LED (7) Reset button (10) ETH0 (Ethernet port) (13) COM port (16) OFFLINE LED (5) ALM LED (8) SHUTDOWN button (11) ETH1 (Ethernet port) (14) VGA port (17) Hard disk (6) ACT LED (9) USB port (12) ETH2 (Ethernet port) (15) HD LED
9 BSC Boards
(18) Screw for fixing the hard disk
NOTE
l l l l l
The self-locking latch on the panel is used to fasten the ejector lever of the board. The RESET button on the panel is used to reset the system. To power off the GOMU, you should first unfold the upper and lower handles. After the OFFLINE LED is on, disconnect the power. A COM port is on the panel for conenction to alarm box. Do not perform any operation on the SHUTDOWN button on the GOMU panel; otherwise, the GOMU board may power off abnormally.
9.10.3 LEDs on the GOMU Panel

There are five LEDs on the GOMU panel: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD. Table 9-32 describes the LEDs on the GOMU panel. Table 9-32 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off OFFLINE Blue On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode. The board can be removed. The board cannot be removed.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-49
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
Meaning The status of the board is switching. The hard disk is performing read and write functions. The hard disk is not performing read and write functions.
HD
Green
Blinking
Off
9.10.4 Ports on the GOMU Panel

The ports on the GOMU panel consist of four USB ports (labeled USB0-1 and USB2-3), three GE ports (labeled ETH0, ETH1, and ETH2), one serial port COM-ALM/COM-BMC, and one VGA port. Table 9-33 describes the ports on the GOMU panel. Table 9-33 Ports on the GOMU panel Port USB0-1 and USB2-3 ETH0 to ETH2 COM-ALM/COM-BMC Function It is used to connect the USB equipment. These are the GE ports. Serial port. They are used for system commissioning or general application. Video connector Connector RJ45 DB-9
VGA port
9.11 GSCU
The GSCU is the GSM Switching and Control Unit. It is installed in slots 6-7 in the GMPS/ GEPS/GTCS. The GSCU is configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.11.1 Functions of the GSCU The GSCU provides an OM and GE switching platform for the subrack where it is located. 9.11.2 GSCU Panel The components on the GSCU panel are the LEDs and ports. 9.11.3 LEDs on the GSCU Panel There are four types of LEDs on the GSCU panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. 9.11.4 Ports on the GSCU Panel
9 BSC Boards
The GSCU panel provides fifteen ports, of which twelve ports are labeled 10/100/1000BASET, one COM, one CLKIN, and one TESTOUT.
9.11.1 Functions of the GSCU

The GSCU provides an OM and GE switching platform for the subrack where it is located. The GSCU performs the following functions:
l l l
Maintains and manages the subrack where the GSCU is located Provides a GE switching platform for the boards located in the subrack Provides clock information for the boards (excluding the GGCU, GXPUT, and GXPUM) in the subrack
9.11.2 GSCU Panel

The components on the GSCU panel are the LEDs and ports. Figure 9-15 shows the GSCU panel. Figure 9-15 GSCU panel
SCUa
RUN ALM ACT

RESET LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
LINK ACT
10/100/1000BASE-T
4 5 6 7
LINK ACT
8 9
10 11
TESTOUT
PARC
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
CLKIN
COM
9-51
9 BSC Boards
9.11.3 LEDs on the GSCU Panel

There are four types of LEDs on the GSCU panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. Table 9-34 describes the LEDs on the GSCU panel. Table 9-34 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
Table 9-35 describes the LEDs of the Ethernet ports on the GSCU panel. Table 9-35 LEDs of the Ethernet ports LED LINK Color Green Status On Meaning LEDs of the Ethernet ports, indicating that the link is connected LEDs of the Ethernet ports, indicating that the link is disconnected LEDs of the Ethernet ports, indicating that there is a data flow LEDs of the Ethernet ports, indicating that there is no data flow
Off
ACT
Green
Blinking
Off
9-52
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.11.4 Ports on the GSCU Panel

The GSCU panel provides fifteen ports, of which twelve ports are labeled 10/100/1000BASET, one COM, one CLKIN, and one TESTOUT. Table 9-36 describes the ports on the GSCU panel. Table 9-36 Ports on the GSCU panel Port 10/100/100 0BASE-T0 to 10/100/100 0BASE-T9 10/100/100 0BASET10 to 10/100/100 0BASET11 COM CLKIN TESTOUT Function 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet ports, used to connect subracks Port RJ45
10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet ports, used to connect to the GBAM (Only the main subrack is connected to the GBAM/ GOMU.)
RJ45
Debugging port Clock source port, used to receive the 8 kHz clock signals from the GGCU panel Clock test signal port, used to generate clock signals
RJ45 RJ45 SMB male connector
9.12 GTNU
The GTNU is the GSM TDM switching network unit in the BSC. It is installed in slots 4-5 in the GMPS/GEPS/GTCS. The GTNU is configured in pairs and work in active/standby mode. 9.12.1 Functions of the GTNU The GTNU serves as the switching center for the CS services of the entire system. 9.12.2 GTNU Panel The components on the GTNU panel are the LEDs and ports. 9.12.3 LEDs on the GTNU Panel There are three LEDs on the GTNU panel: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.12.4 Ports on the GTNU Panel The GTNU panel provides six ports labeled TDM0-TDM5,
9.12.1 Functions of the GTNU

The GTNU serves as the switching center for the CS services of the entire system. The GTNU performs the following functions:
9 BSC Boards
l l
Provides 128Kx128K TDM switching Allocates TDM network resources, and sets up and releases network connections
9.12.2 GTNU Panel

The components on the GTNU panel are the LEDs and ports. Figure 9-16 shows the GTNU panel. Figure 9-16 GTNU panel
TNUa
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
9.12.3 LEDs on the GTNU Panel

There are three LEDs on the GTNU panel: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-37 describes the LEDs on the GTNU panel.
9-54
TDM5
TDM4
TDM3
TDM2
TDM1
TDM0
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.12.4 Ports on the GTNU Panel

The GTNU panel provides six ports labeled TDM0-TDM5, Table 9-38 describes the ports on the GTNU panel. Table 9-38 Ports on the GTNU panel Port TDM0 to TDM5 Function TDM high-speed serial ports, used for GTNU interconnections between subracks Port DB14
NOTE
The BSC supports the inter-GTNU connections between the GMPS and the GEPS. It also supports the inter-GTNU connections between GTCSs.
9.13 GXPUM
The GXPUM is the GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Main service in the BSC. It can be installed in slots 0-1 in the GMPS/GEPS and work in active/standby mode. 9.13.1 Functions of the GXPUM The GXPUM processes the primary services of the BSC.
9 BSC Boards
9.13.2 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel The components on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel are the LEDs and ports. 9.13.3 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel There are four types of LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. 9.13.4 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel The GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel provides four ports labeled 10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10/100/1000BASE-T3.
9.13.1 Functions of the GXPUM

The GXPUM processes the primary services of the BSC. The GXPUM performs the following functions:
l l l l l l l l l l l
Provides paging control Provides System Information management Provides channel assignment Provides BTS public service management Provides voice call control Provides packet service control Provides handover control Provides power control Interfaces with the Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) on behalf of the BSC Stores cell broadcast messages Schedules cell broadcast messages, which are transmitted on the Cell Broadcast Channels (CBCHs) Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol
9.13.2 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel

The components on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel are the LEDs and ports. Figure 9-17 shows the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel.
9-56
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-17 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel

XPUa
RUN ALM ACT
LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
10/100/1000BASE-T
PARC
9.13.3 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel

There are four types of LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. Table 9-39 describes the LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel. Table 9-39 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-57
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
NOTE
The functions of the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI Ethernet ports are the same as those of the GSCU Ethernet ports.
9.13.4 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel

The GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel provides four ports labeled 10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10/100/1000BASE-T3. Table 9-40 describes the ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel. Table 9-40 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel Port 10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10/100/1000BASE-T3 Function Provides 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports Port RJ45
9.14 GXPUT
The GXPUT is the GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Transmission in the BSC and processes signals according to the LAPD protocol and SS7 MTP3 protocol. When the number of TRXs to be supported by the GMPS/GEPS is greater than 256, the GXPUT can be installed in slots 2-3 in the GMPS/GEPS and work in active/standby mode. 9.14.1 Functions of the GXPUT The GXPUT processes the signals according to the Link Access Procedure on the D channel (LAPD) protocol and the SS7 MTP3 protocol. 9.14.2 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel The components on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel are the LEDs and ports. 9.14.3 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel There are four types of LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. 9.14.4 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel
9 BSC Boards
The GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel provides four ports labeled 10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10/100/1000BASE-T3.
9.14.1 Functions of the GXPUT

The GXPUT processes the signals according to the Link Access Procedure on the D channel (LAPD) protocol and the SS7 MTP3 protocol. The GXPUT performs the following functions:
l l
Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP3 protocol

The components on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel are the LEDs and ports. Figure 9-18 shows the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel. Figure 9-18 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel
XPUa
RUN ALM ACT
LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
10/100/1000BASE-T
PARC
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-59
9 BSC Boards

There are four types of LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. Table 9-41 describes the LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel. Table 9-41 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
NOTE

9-60
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.15 GXPUI
The GXPUI is the GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Computation service in the BSC and implements the IBCA algorithm. It can be configured in slots 2-3 in the GMPS/GEPS and does not work in active/standby mode. 9.15.1 Functions of the GXPUI The GXPUI performs the following functions: Implements the IBCA algorithm. 9.15.2 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel The components on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel are the LEDs and ports. 9.15.3 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel There are four types of LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. 9.15.4 Ports on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel The GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel provides four ports labeled 10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10/100/1000BASE-T3.
9.15.1 Functions of the GXPUI

The GXPUI performs the following functions: Implements the IBCA algorithm. The GXPUI performs the following functions:
l
Implements the IBCA algorithm.

The components on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel are the LEDs and ports. Figure 9-19 shows the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-61
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-19 GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel

XPUa
RUN ALM ACT
LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
10/100/1000BASE-T
PARC

There are four types of LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. Table 9-43 describes the LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel. Table 9-43 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty.
9-62
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
NOTE

9.16 GFGUA
The GFGUA is the GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for the A interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. If the BSC need not process packet services, the GFGUA can be installed in slots 14-15. The GFGUA can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.16.1 Functions of the GFGUA The GFGUA enables the FE/GE transmission on the A interface. 9.16.2 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.16.3 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the
9 BSC Boards
same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (for Ethernet port), and ACT (for Ethernet port). 9.16.4 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the ten ports, six ports are labeled FE, two FE/GE, one 2M0, and one 2M1.
9.16.1 Functions of the GFGUA

The GFGUA enables the FE/GE transmission on the A interface. The GFGUA performs the following functions:
l l l l
Provides IP routing Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Provides eight FE ports or two GE ports logically, which are used for IP transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards. Supports virtual local area network (VLAN) Supports the bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) of a single hop link
l l
9.16.2 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-20 shows the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel.
9-64
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-20 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel

FG2a
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
9.16.3 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (for Ethernet port), and ACT (for Ethernet port). Table 9-45 describes the LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Table 9-45 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
2M1 2M0
10/100M 10/100M 10/100M 10/100/1000M
10/100M 10/100M 10/100M 10/100/1000M
9-65
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status On Off
Meaning There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
Table 9-46 describes the LEDs of the Ethernet ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Table 9-46 LEDs of the Ethernet ports LED LINK Color Green Status On Off ACT Orange Blinking Off Meaning The link is connected. The link is disconnected. Data is being transmitted through the port. No data is being transmitted through the port.
9.16.4 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the ten ports, six ports are labeled FE, two FE/GE, one 2M0, and one 2M1. Table 9-47 describes the ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Table 9-47 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel Port FE Function The 10/100 Ethernet ports are used to transmit 10/100 Mbit/s signals. Port RJ45
9-66
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Port FE/GE
Function The 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports are used to transmit 10/100/1000 Mbit/s signals. Reserved Reserved
Port RJ45
2M0 2M1
NOTE
The GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel provides eight Ethernet ports in two groups. The four Ethernet ports in each group are physically numbered 0 to 3. Logically, the eight Ethernet ports are numbered 0 to 7. The eight Ethernet ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel can logically provide eight FE ports or two GE ports for IP transmission. The two ports labeled FE/GE can provide either GE transmission or FE transmission. Note that the eight FE ports and the two GE ports of the same interface board cannot be used simultaneously.
9.17 GFGUB
The GFGUB is the GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. If the BSC need not process packet services, the GFGUB can be installed in slots 14-15. The GFGUB can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.17.1 Functions of the GFGUB The GFGUB enables the FE/GE transmission on the Abis interface. 9.17.2 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.17.3 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (for Ethernet port), and ACT (for Ethernet port). 9.17.4 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the ten ports, six ports are labeled FE, two FE/GE, one 2M0, and one 2M1.
9.17.1 Functions of the GFGUB

The GFGUB enables the FE/GE transmission on the Abis interface. The GFGUB performs the following functions:
9 BSC Boards
l l l l
Provides IP routing Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Provides eight FE ports or two GE ports logically, which are used for IP transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards.

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-21 shows the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Figure 9-21 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel
FG2a
RUN ALM ACT
PARC

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the
2M1 2M0
10/100M 10/100M 10/100M 10/100/1000M
10/100M 10/100M 10/100M 10/100/1000M
9 BSC Boards
same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (for Ethernet port), and ACT (for Ethernet port). Table 9-48 describes the LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Table 9-48 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the ten ports, six ports are labeled FE, two FE/GE, one 2M0, and one 2M1. Table 9-50 describes the ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-69
9 BSC Boards
Table 9-50 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel Port FE Function The 10/100 Ethernet ports are used to transmit 10/100 Mbit/s signals. The 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports are used to transmit 10/100/1000 Mbit/s signals. Reserved Reserved Port RJ45
FE/GE
RJ45
2M0 2M1
NOTE
9.18 GFGUG
The GFGUG is the GSM Fast ethernet and Gigabit ethernet Unit for the Gb interface. It can be installed in slots 14-15 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GFGUG can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.18.1 Functions of the GFGUG The GFGUG enables the FE/GE transmission on the Gb interface. 9.18.2 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.18.3 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (for Ethernet port), and ACT (for Ethernet port). 9.18.4 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the ten ports, six ports are labeled FE, two FE/GE, one 2M0, and one 2M1.
9-70
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.18.1 Functions of the GFGUG

The GFGUG enables the FE/GE transmission on the Gb interface. The GFGUG performs the following functions:
l l l l
Provides IP routing Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing Provides eight FE ports or two GE ports logically, which are used for IP transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards.

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-22 shows the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Figure 9-22 GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel
FG2a
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
2M1 2M0
10/100M 10/100M 10/100M 10/100/1000M
10/100M 10/100M 10/100M 10/100/1000M
9-71
9 BSC Boards

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (for Ethernet port), and ACT (for Ethernet port). Table 9-51 describes the LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Table 9-51 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
9-72
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the ten ports, six ports are labeled FE, two FE/GE, one 2M0, and one 2M1. Table 9-53 describes the ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Table 9-53 Ports on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel Port FE Function The 10/100 Ethernet ports are used to transmit 10/100 Mbit/s signals. The 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports are used to transmit 10/100/1000 Mbit/s signals. Reserved Reserved Port RJ45
FE/GE
RJ45
2M0 2M1
NOTE
9.19 GOGUA
The GOGUA is the GSM Optic Gigabit ethernet Unit for the A interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. When the BSC need not process packet services, the GOGUA can also be installed in slots 14-15. The GOGUA can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.19.1 Functions of the GOGUA The GOGUA enables the GE transmission on the A interface. 9.19.2 GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.19.3 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel
9 BSC Boards
The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.19.4 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the four ports, two ports are labeled RX/TX, one 2MO, and one 2M1. 9.19.5 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) The technical specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB consist of the optical port mode, optical port type, wavelength, transmission rate, transmission distance, output power, and receiver sensitivity.
9.19.1 Functions of the GOGUA

The GOGUA enables the GE transmission on the A interface. The GOGUA performs the following functions:
l l
Provides two GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission Provides Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function to enable switchover between the optical channel links of the active and standby boards. Supports virtual local area network (VLAN) Supports the bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) of a single hop link
l l
9.19.2 GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-23 shows the GOGUA/GOGUB panel.
9-74
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-23 GOGUA/GOGUB panel

GOUa
RUN ALM ACT
RX TX
RX TX
PARC
9.19.3 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-54 describes the LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel. Table 9-54 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty.
9-75
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
2M1 2M0
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
9.19.4 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the four ports, two ports are labeled RX/TX, one 2MO, and one 2M1. Table 9-55 describes the ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel. Table 9-55 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel Port RX TX Function Optical ports, used to receive and transmit optical signals. TX indicates the transmitting optical port and RX indicates the receiving optical port. Reserved. Reserved. Port LC/PC
2M0 2M1
9.19.5 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa)

The technical specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB consist of the optical port mode, optical port type, wavelength, transmission rate, transmission distance, output power, and receiver sensitivity. Table 9-56 lists the technical specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB. Table 9-56 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB Specification Optical port mode
9-76
Value Single mode Multimode

Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Specification Optical port type Central wavelength Transmission rate Transmission distance Maximum output optical power Minimum output optical power Maximum receiver sensitivity
Value LC/PC 1,310 nm 1.25 Gbit/s 10 km -3 dBm -9.5 dBm -20 dBm LC/PC 850 nm 2.125 Gbit/s 0.5 km -2.5 dBm -9.5 dBm -17 dBm
9.20 GOGUB
The GOGUB is the GSM Optic Gigabit ethernet Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. When the BSC need not process packet services, the GOGUB can also be installed in slots 14-15. The GOGUB can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.20.1 Functions of the GOGUB The GOGUB enables the GE transmission on the Abis interface. 9.20.2 GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.20.3 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.20.4 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the four ports, two ports are labeled RX/TX, one 2MO, and one 2M1. 9.20.5 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) The technical specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB consist of the optical port mode, optical port type, wavelength, transmission rate, transmission distance, output power, and receiver sensitivity.
9.20.1 Functions of the GOGUB

The GOGUB enables the GE transmission on the Abis interface. The GOGUB performs the following functions:
9 BSC Boards
l l
Provides two GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission Provides Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function to enable switchover between the optical channel links of the active and standby boards.
9.20.2 GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-24 shows the GOGUA/GOGUB panel. Figure 9-24 GOGUA/GOGUB panel
GOUa
RUN ALM ACT
RX TX
RX TX
PARC
9.20.3 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-57 describes the LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel.
2M1 2M0
9 BSC Boards
9.20.4 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the four ports, two ports are labeled RX/TX, one 2MO, and one 2M1. Table 9-58 describes the ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel. Table 9-58 Ports on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel Port RX TX Function Optical ports, used to receive and transmit optical signals. TX indicates the transmitting optical port and RX indicates the receiving optical port. Reserved. Reserved. Port LC/PC
2M0 2M1
9.20.5 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa)

The technical specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB consist of the optical port mode, optical port type, wavelength, transmission rate, transmission distance, output power, and receiver sensitivity.
9 BSC Boards
Table 9-59 lists the technical specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB. Table 9-59 Technical Specifications of the GOGUA/GOGUB Specification Optical port mode Optical port type Central wavelength Transmission rate Transmission distance Maximum output optical power Minimum output optical power Maximum receiver sensitivity Value Single mode LC/PC 1,310 nm 1.25 Gbit/s 10 km -3 dBm -9.5 dBm -20 dBm Multimode LC/PC 850 nm 2.125 Gbit/s 0.5 km -2.5 dBm -9.5 dBm -17 dBm
9.21 GEHUB
The GEHUB is the GSM E1/T1 High level Data Link Control Unit for the Abis interface. It can be installed in slots 18-27 in the GMPS/GEPS. When the BSC need not process packet services, the GEHUB can also be installed in slots 14-15. The GEHUB can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.21.1 Functions of the GEHUB The GEHUB enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Abis interface. 9.21.2 GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.21.3 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.21.4 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the six ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, and one 2M1. 9.21.5 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9 BSC Boards
9.21.1 Functions of the GEHUB

The GEHUB enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Abis interface. The GEHUB performs the following functions:
l l l
Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports, which are used for HDLC/Hub BTS transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards. Transmits and receives 32 E1/T1 signals, and encodes and decodes the E1/T1 signals (The E1 transmission rate is 2.048 Mbit/s and the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.)
9.21.2 GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-25 shows the GEHUB/GEPUG panel. Figure 9-25 GEHUB/GEPUG panel
PEUa
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
2M1 2M0
E1/T1(0~7)
E1/T1(8~15)
E1/T1(16~23)
E1/T1(24~31)
9-81
9 BSC Boards
9.21.3 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-60 describes the LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel. Table 9-60 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
9.21.4 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the six ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, and one 2M1. Table 9-61 describes the ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel. Table 9-61 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel Port E1/T1 (0-7) Function E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 0-7 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 8-15 Port DB44
E1/T1 (8-15)
DB44
9-82
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Port E1/T1 (16-23)
Function E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 16-23 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 24-31 One of the two clock signal output ports, used to extract the 2 MHz line clock signals from the upper-level devices, send them to the GGCU, and take them as the system clock source. One of the two clock signal output ports, used to extract the 2 MHz line clock signals from the upper-level devices, send them to the GGCU, and take them as the system clock source.
Port DB44
E1/T1 (24-31)
DB44
2M0
SMB male connector
2M1
SMB male connector
9.21.5 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa)

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. Figure 9-26 shows the DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-83
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-26 DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG
S2 S4 S8 S6
ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
8 1
1 8
ON S10 OFF
(1) Sub-board
(2) Bottom plate
NOTE
l l
All the DIP switches are located on the front side of the sub-board, and cannot be directly observed since the sub-board is engaged to the bottom plate with its front side facing the bottom plate. The DIP switches, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10, are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-26, a square opening is configured respectively between the S2 and the S4, and between the S8 and the S6 for the operator to operate these switches. Switch S10 is locates at the right lower corner of the sub-board, therefore it can be operated from the edge of the sub-board.
The DIP switches, S2, S4, S6, and S8, are used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting ends of E1/T1 links 0 to 31, and S10 is used to set the E1 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 working mode. Table 9-62 and Table 9-63 describe S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. Table 9-62 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (75-ohm coaxial cable) DIP Switch S2 DIP Bit 1-8 Description Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 24-31 Switch Status ON Meaning 0
9-84
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
DIP Switch S4
DIP Bit 1-8
Description Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 16-23 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 0-7 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 8-15 Work mode switch, consisting of two DIP bits.
Switch Status ON
Meaning 0
S6
1-8
ON
S8
1-8
ON
S10
1-2
E1 unbalanced mode (ON, ON)
(0, 0)
Table 9-63 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (120-ohm twisted pair cable) DIP Switch S2 DIP Bit 1-8 Description Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 24-31 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 16-23 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 0-7 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 8-15 Work mode switch, consisting of two DIP bits. Switch Status OFF Meaning 1
S4
1-8
OFF
S6
1-8
OFF
S8
1-8
OFF
S10
1-2
E1 balanced mode (OFF, ON) T1 mode (ON, OFF)
(1, 0) (0, 1)
NOTE
When the signals are transmitted through a 75-ohm coaxial cable in E1 unbalanced mode, set the DIP switch to ON and ground the TX end. When the signals are transmitted through a 120-ohm twisted pair cable in E1 balanced mode or T1 mode, set the DIP switch to OFF and do not ground the TX end. By default, all the DIP switches are set for the transmission in E1 balanced mode. That is, all bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are set to OFF. Bit 1 of S10 is set to OFF and bit 2 of S10 is set to ON.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-85
9 BSC Boards
9.22 GEPUG
The GEPUG is the GSM E1/T1 Packet Unit for the Gb interface. It can be installed in slots 14-15 in the GMPS/GEPS. The GEPUG can work in active/standby mode and work independently. 9.22.1 Functions of the GEPUG The GEPUG enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Gb interface. 9.22.2 GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. 9.22.3 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 9.22.4 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the six ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, and one 2M1. 9.22.5 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.22.1 Functions of the GEPUG

The GEPUG enables the E1/T1 transmission on the Gb interface. The GEPUG performs the following functions:
l l
Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports, which are used for FR transmission Provides Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function to enable switchover between the physical links of the active and standby boards. Transmits and receives 32 E1/T1 signals, and encodes and decodes the E1/T1 signals (The E1 transmission rate is 2.048 Mbit/s and the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.)
9.22.2 GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same appearance and the same LEDs and ports. Figure 9-27 shows the GEHUB/GEPUG panel.
9-86
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-27 GEHUB/GEPUG panel

PEUa
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
9.22.3 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-64 describes the LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel. Table 9-64 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty.
9-87
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
2M1 2M0
E1/T1(0~7)
E1/T1(8~15)
E1/T1(16~23)
E1/T1(24~31)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
9.22.4 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same ports. Of the six ports, four ports are labeled E1/T1, one 2MO, and one 2M1. Table 9-65 describes the ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel. Table 9-65 Ports on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel Port E1/T1 (0-7) Function E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 0-7 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 8-15 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 16-23 E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive the E1/T1 signals on routes 24-31 One of the two clock signal output ports, used to extract the 2 MHz line clock signals from the upper-level devices, send them to the GGCU, and take them as the system clock source. One of the two clock signal output ports, used to extract the 2 MHz line clock signals from the upper-level devices, send them to the GGCU, and take them as the system clock source. Port DB44
E1/T1 (8-15)
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23)
DB44
E1/T1 (24-31)
DB44
2M0
SMB male connector
2M1
SMB male connector
9-88
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.22.5 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa)

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. Figure 9-28 shows the DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG. Figure 9-28 DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG
S2 S4 S8 S6
8 1
1 8
ON S10 OFF
(1) Sub-board
(2) Bottom plate
NOTE
l l
The DIP switches, S2, S4, S6, and S8, are used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting ends of E1/T1 links 0 to 31, and S10 is used to set the E1 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 working mode. Table 9-66 and Table 9-67 describe S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-89
9 BSC Boards
Table 9-66 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (75-ohm coaxial cable) DIP Switch S2 DIP Bit 1-8 Description Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 24-31 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 16-23 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 0-7 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 8-15 Work mode switch, consisting of two DIP bits. Switch Status ON Meaning 0
S4
1-8
ON
S6
1-8
ON
S8
1-8
ON
S10
1-2
(0, 0)
S4
1-8
OFF
S6
1-8
OFF
S8
1-8
OFF
S10
1-2
(1, 0) (0, 1)
9-90
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)

NOTE
9 BSC Boards
9.23 GDPUC
The GDPUC is the CS service processing unit in the BSC. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the GTCS, the GDPUC can be installed in slots 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installed in the GTCS, the GDPUC can be installed in slots 1 to 3 and slots 8 to 13. 9.23.1 Functions of the GDPUC(DPUa) The GDPUC processes voice services and data services. 9.23.2 GDPUC(DPUa) Panel The components on the GDPUC panel are the LEDs. 9.23.3 LEDs on the GDPUC(DPUa) Panel The LEDs on the GDPUC panel are labeled RUN, ALM, and ACT respectively.
9.23.1 Functions of the GDPUC(DPUa)

The GDPUC processes voice services and data services. The GDPUC performs the following functions:
l l l
Encodes and decodes voice signals Provides data service rate adaptation Provides Tandem Free Operation (TFO) functions When the calling and called MSs use one voice coding scheme, the voice signals are encoded only once at the originating MS and decoded only once at the terminating MS. This reduces repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services.
l l
Provides voice enhancement function Detects voice faults automatically
9.23.2 GDPUC(DPUa) Panel

The components on the GDPUC panel are the LEDs. Figure 9-29 shows the GDPUC panel.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-91
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-29 GDPUC panel

DPUa
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
9.23.3 LEDs on the GDPUC(DPUa) Panel

The LEDs on the GDPUC panel are labeled RUN, ALM, and ACT respectively. Table 9-68 describes the LEDs on the GDPUC panel. Table 9-68 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty.
9-92
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
Meaning There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works properly. There is no power input or the board is faulty.
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
9.24 GDPUX
The GDPUX is the GSM Data Processing Unit for eXtensible services. It can be installed in slots 8-11 in the GMPS; slots 0-3, 8-13, and 14-27 in the GEPS; and slots 0-3, 8-13 in the GTCS. 9.24.1 Functions of the GDPUX(DPUc) The GDPUX processes voice services and data services. 9.24.2 GDPUX(DPUc) Panel The components on the GDPUX panel are the LEDs. 9.24.3 LEDs on the GDPUX(DPUc) Panel The LEDs on the GDPUX panel are RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.24.1 Functions of the GDPUX(DPUc)

The GDPUX processes voice services and data services. The GDPUX inherits all the functions of the GDPUC. It performs the following functions:
l
Provides format conversion for 3740 IP speech paths and HDLC optimized speech paths as well as data forwarding The GDPUX in the GMPS/GEPS performs the function mentioned above in any of the following configuration modes: BM/TC combined, A over IP and Abis over IP, or A over IP and Abis over HDLC.
Encodes and decodes the signals transmitted over a maximum of 960 speech paths The GDPUX in the GMPS/GEPS performs the function mentioned above in any of the following configuration modes: BM/TC combined, or A over IP and Abis over TDM. The GDPUX in the GTCS performs the function mentioned above in the BM/TC separated configuration mode.
Provides Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function When the calling and called MSs use one voice coding scheme, the voice signals are encoded only once at the originating MS and decoded only once at the terminating MS. This reduces repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services.
l l
Provides voice enhancement function Detects voice faults automatically

Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.24.2 GDPUX(DPUc) Panel

The components on the GDPUX panel are the LEDs. Figure 9-30 shows the GDPUX panel. Figure 9-30 GDPUX panel
DPUc
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
9.24.3 LEDs on the GDPUX(DPUc) Panel

The LEDs on the GDPUX panel are RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-69 describes the LEDs on the GDPUX panel. Table 9-69 LEDs on the board LED RUN
9-94
Color Green
Status On for 1s and off for 1s
Meaning The board is working.

Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off
Meaning The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works properly. There is no power input or the board is faulty.
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
9.25 GDPUP
The GDPUP is the GSM Data Processing Unit for PS services. It can be installed in slots 8-13 in the GMPS/GEPS. 9.25.1 Functions of the GDPUP(DPUd) The GDPUP processes the packet services for the BSC. 9.25.2 GDPUP(DPUd) Panel The GDPUP board has only LEDs on its panel. 9.25.3 LEDs on the GDPUP(DPUd) Panel The LEDs on the GDPUP panel are RUN, ALM, and ACT.
9.25.1 Functions of the GDPUP(DPUd)

The GDPUP processes the packet services for the BSC. The GDPUP performs the following functions:
l
Processes the packet services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are coded in MCS9 Processes packet links Detects packet faults automatically
l l
9.25.2 GDPUP(DPUd) Panel

The GDPUP board has only LEDs on its panel. Figure 9-31 shows the GDPUP panel.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-95
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-31 GDPUP panel

DPUd
RUN ALM ACT
PARC
9.25.3 LEDs on the GDPUP(DPUd) Panel

The LEDs on the GDPUP panel are RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 9-70 describes the LEDs on the GDPUP panel. Table 9-70 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty.
9-96
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
LED
Color
Status Off
Meaning There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works properly. There is no power input or the board is faulty.
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Green
On Off
9.26 MDMC
The MDMC is the power monitoring communication board for the BSC common power distribution box. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the GBCR/GBSR. Each power distribution box should be configured with one MDMC. 9.26.1 Functions of the MDMC The MDMC is used to monitor the BSC power distribution box. 9.26.2 MDMC Panel The components on the MDMC are the LEDs and mute switch. 9.26.3 LEDs on the MDMC Panel There are two LEDs on the MDMC panel: RUN and ALM. 9.26.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC There is a DIP switch labeled S2 on the MDMC.
9.26.1 Functions of the MDMC

The MDMC is used to monitor the BSC power distribution box. The MDMC performs the following functions:
l l l l l l l
Detects two -48 V inputs Detects signals from one external temperature sensor Detects signals from one external humidity sensor Detects signals from two lightning protection devices Detects the status of six power output switches Generates and reports audible and visual alarms Communicates with the GSCU, reports the status of the power distribution box, and exchanges the OM information with the GSCU
9.26.2 MDMC Panel

The components on the MDMC are the LEDs and mute switch. Figure 9-32 shows the MDMC panel.
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-32 MDMC panel
RUN ALM
ON OFF
(1) Mute switch
NOTE
The mute switch is used to control the audible alarm of the power distribution box.
l l
9.26.3 LEDs on the MDMC Panel

There are two LEDs on the MDMC panel: RUN and ALM. Table 9-71 describes the LEDs on the MDMC panel. Table 9-71 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s Off ALM Red Off On Meaning The board is working and communicating with the GSCU. The board cannot communicate with the GSCU, or the board is not working. There is no power supply or the power distribution box is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. When the board is starting up, the status indicates that the ALM indicator functions well.
9-98
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.26.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC

There is a DIP switch labeled S2 on the MDMC. Figure 9-33 shows the DIP switch on the MDMC. Figure 9-33 DIP switch on the MDMC
1 4
ON OFF
S2
S2 is used to set the address of the MDMC. To set the address of the MDMC, pull out the MDMC, and then set S2 by referring to Table 9-72. Table 9-72 Setting of S2 Address 0 DIP Bit 1 (the most significant bit) 2 3 4 (the least significant bit) Switch Status ON ON ON ON Meaning 0 0 0 0
NOTE
In the BSC, the DIP switch on the MDMC must be set according to the specifications listed in Table 9-72.
9.27 PAMU
The PAMU is the power monitoring communication board for the BSC high-power distribution box. It is configured in the power distribution box at the top of the GBCR/GBSR. Each power distribution box should be configured with one PAMU. 9.27.1 Functions of the PAMU The PAMU is used to monitor the BSC power distribution box. 9.27.2 PAMU Panel The components on the PAMU are the LEDs and mute switch. 9.27.3 LEDs on the PAMU Panel
9 BSC Boards
There are two LEDs on the PAMU panel: RUN and ALM. 9.27.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU There is a DIP switch labeled SW1 on the PAMU.
9.27.1 Functions of the PAMU

The PAMU is used to monitor the BSC power distribution box. The PAMU performs the following functions:
l
Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and generates alarms (only four inputs are used by the BSC) Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports alarms Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and communicates with the GSCU Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports
l l
9.27.2 PAMU Panel

The components on the PAMU are the LEDs and mute switch. Figure 9-34 shows the PAMU panel. Figure 9-34 PAMU panel
RUN ALM
1 2 3
MUTE
(1) RUN LED
(2) ALM LED
(3) Mute switch
9-100
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
NOTE
The mute switch determines whether to turn off the alarm sound of the power distribution box.
l l
9.27.3 LEDs on the PAMU Panel

There are two LEDs on the PAMU panel: RUN and ALM. Table 9-73 describes the LEDs on the PAMU panel. Table 9-73 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s Off ALM Red Off On Meaning The board is working and communicating with the GSCU. The board cannot communicate with the GSCU, or the board is not working. There is no power supply or the power distribution box is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. When the board is starting up, the status indicates that the ALM indicator functions well.
9.27.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU

There is a DIP switch labeled SW1 on the PAMU. Figure 9-35 shows the DIP switch on the PAMU. Figure 9-35 DIP switch on the PAMU
ON
SW1 OFF
SW1 (with four bits) is used to set the address of the PAMU.
9 BSC Boards
To set the address of the PAMU, pull out the PAMU, and then set SW1 by referring to Table 9-74. Table 9-74 Settings of SW1 Address 0 DIP Bit 1 (the most significant bit) 2 3 4 (the least significant bit) Switch Status ON ON ON ON Meaning 0 0 0 0
NOTE
In the BSC, the DIP switch on the PAMU must be set according to the specifications listed in Table 9-74.
9.28 PFCU
The PFCU is the fan control unit. It is installed in the front of a fan box. Each fan box must be configured with one PFCU. 9.28.1 Functions of the PFCU The PFCU is used to monitor the fan box. 9.28.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU There is a DIP switch labeled SW1 on the PFCU.
9.28.1 Functions of the PFCU

The PFCU is used to monitor the fan box. The PFCU performs the following functions:
l
Monitors the operating status of the fans and indicates the current status of the fan box through the LEDs Communicates with the GSCU and reports the working status of the fan box Detects the temperature of the fan box and collects temperature data through a temperature sensor Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals for fan speed adjustment Reports the operating status and alarms of the fan box through the LEDs
l l
l l
9.28.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU

There is a DIP switch labeled SW1 on the PFCU. Figure 9-36 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU.
9 BSC Boards
Figure 9-36 DIP switch on the PFCU
1 4
SW1
ON OFF
SW1 (with four bits) is used to set the address of the PFCU. To set the address of the PFCU, pull out the fan box, and then set SW1 by referring to Table 9-75. For how to pull out the fan box, refer to Replacing the BSC Fan Box. After the setting, the address of the PFCU is 1. Table 9-75 Settings of S1 Address SW1 DIP Bit 1 (the least significant bit) 2 3 4 (the most significant bit) Switch Status OFF ON ON ON Meaning 1 0 0 0
NOTE
In the BSC, the DIP switch on the PFCU must be set according to the specifications listed in Table 9-75.
9.29 PFCB
The PFCB is the fan control board. It is installed in the front of a fan box. Each fan box must be configured with one PFCB. 9.29.1 Functions of the PFCB The PFCB is used to monitor the fan box. 9.29.2 Jumper Pins on the PFCB The PFCB provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers, these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB .
9.29.1 Functions of the PFCB

The PFCB is used to monitor the fan box. The PFCB performs the following functions:
9 BSC Boards
l
Monitors the operating status of the fans and indicates the current status of the fan box through the LEDs Reports the operating status of the fan box and receives the instructions on adjusting the fan speed Adjusts the fan speed intelligently according to the temperature data collected by the temperature sensor Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals for fan speed adjustment Reports the operating status and alarms of the fan box through the LEDs
l l
9.29.2 Jumper Pins on the PFCB

The PFCB provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers, these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB . Figure 9-37 shows the jumper pins on the PFCB . Figure 9-37 Jumper pins on the PFCB
J3
16 2
To set the address, pull out the fan box. Then, set the jumper pins as described in Table 9-76. For how to pull out the fan box, refer to Replacing the BSC Fan Box. After the setting, the address of the PFCB is 1. Table 9-76 Setting of the pins PIN NO. Whether the jumper is inserted 1-2 N 3-4 N 5-6 N 7-8 N 9-10 Y 11-12 N 13-14 N 15-16 N
NOTE
In the BSC, the pins on the PFCB must be set according to the specifications listed in Table 9-76.
9-104
15
J2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9 BSC Boards
9.30 WOPB
The WOPB is the overvoltage protection board in the BSC. It is placed in the power distribution box. Each Common power distribution box should be configured with one WOPB. 9.30.1 Functions of the WOPB This describes the functions of the WOPB. The WOPB provides overvoltage protection for the BSC.
9.30.1 Functions of the WOPB

This describes the functions of the WOPB. The WOPB provides overvoltage protection for the BSC. The WOPB performs the following functions:
l l
Suppresses differential-mode surge voltage Suppresses common-mode surge voltage
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
9-105
10 BSC Cables
10
About This Chapter
This describes the cables of the BSC.
NOTE
BSC Cables
For details on how to install the BSC cables, refer to Installing the BSC Signal Cables and Installing the Power Cables and PGND Cables of the BSC.
Table 10-1 lists the cables used by the BSC. Table 10-1 List of BSC cables Type Power cables and PGND cables Cable Name Power cables and PGND cables for the cabinet Power cables and PGND cables for the subrack Other PGND cables E1/T1 cable Active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable Active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable Service interconnection cable Optical cable Inter-GTNU cable LC/PC-LC/PC-single-mode/multi-mode optical cable LC/PC-FC/PC-single-mode/multi-mode optical cable LC/PC-SC/PC-single-mode/multi-mode optical cable Ethernet cable Straight-through Ethernet cable Crossover cable Clock cables BITS clock signal cable Y-shaped clock cable
10 BSC Cables
Type Other signal cables
Cable Name Signal cable of the alarm box PDB monitoring signal cable RS485 communication cable GOMU serial port cable
10.1 Active/Standby 75-Ohm Coaxial Cable The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cables. The number of active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be configured depends on site requirements. It transmits E1 signals. It is used to connect the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT/GEHUB/GEPUG to the DDF or other NEs. 10.2 Active/Standby 120-Ohm Twisted Pair Cable The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. The number of active/ standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be configured depends on site requirements. It transmits E1/T1 signals. It is used to connect the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT/GEHUB/GEPUG to the DDF or other NEs. 10.3 Inter-GTNU Cable The inter-GTNU cable is an optional signal cable. The number of inter-GTNU cables to be configured depends on site requirements. The inter-GTNU cable is used to connect the GTNUs in different subracks. 10.4 LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable is an optional cable in the BSC. The number of LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to connect the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT/ GOGUA/GOGUB to the ODF or to other NEs. It can also be used to connect two GOIUTs. It transmits optical signals. 10.5 LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable The LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable is an optional cable in the BSC. The number of LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to connect the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT/ GOGUA/GOGUB to the ODF or to other NEs. It transmits optical signals. 10.6 LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable The LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable is an optional cable in the BSC. The number of LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to connect the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT/ GOGUA/GOGUB to the ODF or to other NEs. It transmits optical signals. 10.7 Crossover Cable The crossover cable is an optional Ethernet cable. The number of crossover cables to be configured depends on site requirements. 10.8 Straight-Through Cable The straight-through cable is a mandatory Ethernet cable for the BSC. The number of straightthrough cables to be configured depends on actual requirements.
10 BSC Cables
10.9 BITS Clock Signal Cable The BITS clock signal cable is an optional clock cable. The number of BITS clock cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to transmit BITS clock signals to the GGCU in the GMPS. Based on the impedance, the BITS clock signal cable is classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cable and 120-ohm clock conversion cable. 10.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable The Y-shaped clock cable is an optional clock cable. The number of Y-shaped clock cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to transmit the 8 kHz clock signals from the GGCU in the GMPS to the GSCU in the GEPS. 10.11 Signal cable of the alarm box The signal cable of the alarm box is a type of signal cables. It comes in multiple specifications. You can choose one based on actual requirements. The signal cable of the alarm box is used to transmit the alarm information of the system to the alarm box for audible and visual display. 10.12 PDB monitoring signal cable The power distribution box (PDB) monitoring signal cable is used to transmit monitoring signals from the PDB to the service subracks. 10.13 EMU RS485 communication cable The RS485 communication cable is used for the communication between the BSC and the EMU. 10.14 GOMU serial port cable The GOMU serial port cable is used to connect the GOMU to the local maintenance terminal. 10.15 BSC Power Cable The BSC power cables are classified into external power cables and internal power cables. The power cables are mandatory, which consist of -48 V power cables and RTN power cables. 10.16 BSC PGND cable The BSC PGND cables consist of the PGND cable for the cabinet, inter-cabinet PGND cable, PGND cable for the power distribution box, PGND cable for the subracks, and PGND cable for the cabinet door. All these cables are mandatory.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-3
10 BSC Cables
10.1 Active/Standby 75-Ohm Coaxial Cable

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cables. The number of active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be configured depends on site requirements. It transmits E1 signals. It is used to connect the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT/GEHUB/GEPUG to the DDF or other NEs.
Cable Structure
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2x8 wires. That is, two active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables form one group and each cable contains eight micro coaxial cables. The 16 micro coaxial cables bear eight E1 RX and TX links. Figure 10-1 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable. Figure 10-1 Active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable
3 A Pos.44 A 5 Pos.1 X1 2 5
(1) DB44 connector (2) Shell (metal shell of the DB44 connector)
3 W4
B Pos.44
1 4
W1 W2 W3 X2 Pos.1
(3) Label 1 (identifying one coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the BOM code, version, and information about the cable manufacturer) (5) Label 2 (identifying one coaxial cable)
As shown in Figure 10-1, W3 and W4 are 75-ohm coaxial cables; W1 and W2 are 100-ohm twisted pair cables; X1 and X2 are DB44 connectors, which should be connected to the active/ standby GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT/GEHUB/GEPUG. Table 10-2 describes the mapping between the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable and the pins of the DB44 connector.
10-4
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Table 10-2 Mapping between the micro coaxial cables and the pins of the DB44 connector X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Shell W3 Signal Micro Coaxial Cable 1 Remark s X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor 15 30 2 R2 14 29 3 R3 13 28 4 R4 12 27 5 R5 11 26 6 R6 10 25 7 R7 9 24 8 R8 8 7 Shell W4 Signal Micro Coaxial Cable 1 Remark s
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip
R1
Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Outer Braid of Whole Cable
NOTE
As listed in Table 10-2, T1 indicates the first-route TX link, and R1 indicates the first-route RX link. Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route RX link, and TN indicates the Nth-route TX link.
Table 10-3 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 10-2. Table 10-3 Mapping between the signals and the bearing media Signal Label Ring Tip Bearing Media Shielding layer of the coaxial cable Wire of the coaxial cable
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-5
10 BSC Cables
Table 10-4 describes the mapping between the 100-ohm twisted pair cables (W1 and W2) and the pins of the DB44 connector. Table 10-4 Mapping between the twisted pair cables and the pins of the DB44 connector W2 Pin of X1 Connector 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Shell Pin of X2 Connector 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Shell Braid PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Remarks PAIR W1 Pin of X1 Connector 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell Pin of X2 Connector 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell Braid PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Remarks PAIR
NOTE
As listed in Table 10-4, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer of the twisted pair cable.
Installation Position
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are fixed to the active and standby boards (GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT/GEHUB/GEPUG. The other end of the 75-ohm active/standby coaxial cable is connected to the DDF, and then to other NEs through a transmission device. Alternatively, the other end of the 75-ohm active/standby coaxial cable is directly connected to an NE. Figure 10-2 shows the installation position of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-2 Installation position of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable

75-ohm coaxial cable (active/standby) DDF
EIUa
EIUa
DB44 connector
E1/T1(16~23) E1/T1(24~31) E1/T1(16~23) E1/T1(24~31)
DB44 connector
E1/T1(8~15)
E1/T1(0~7)
PARC
PARC
Active
Standby
10.2 Active/Standby 120-Ohm Twisted Pair Cable

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. The number of active/ standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be configured depends on site requirements. It transmits E1/T1 signals. It is used to connect the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT/GEHUB/GEPUG to the DDF or other NEs.
Cable Structure
Figure 10-3 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
E1/T1(0~7)
E1/T1(8~15)
10-7
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-3 Active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

3 A Pos.44 A 5 Pos.1 X1 2 5
(1) DB44 connector (2) Shell (metal shell of the DB44 connector)
3 W4
1 B Pos.44
1 4
W1 W2 W3
B X 2 Pos.1
(3) Label 1 (identifying one twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the BOM code, version, and manufacturer information about the cable) (5) Label 2 (identifying one twisted pair cable)
As shown in Figure 10-3, W3 and W4 are 120-ohm twisted pair cables; W1 and W2 are 100ohm twisted pair cables; X1 and X2 are DB44 connectors, which should be connected to the active and standby boards. Table 10-5 describes the mapping between the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable and the pins of the DB44 connector. Table 10-5 Mapping between the 120-ohm twisted pair cables and the pins of the DB44 connector X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20
10-8
W3 Signal Identifi er of Twiste d Pair Wire R1
Color
X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor
W4 Signal Identifi er of Twiste d Pair Wire T1
Color
Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+
Blue White
15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27
Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/RTip/R+
Blue White
R2
Orange White
T2
Orange White
R3
Green White
T3
Green White
R4
Brown White
T4
Brown White
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Shell
W3 Signal Identifi er of Twiste d Pair Wire R5
Color
X1 Pin of DB44 Connec tor
W4 Signal Identifi er of Twiste d Pair Wire T5
Color
Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+
Gray White
11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell
Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+ Ring/TTip/T+
Gray White
R6
Blue Red
T6
Blue Red
R7
Orange Red
T7
Orange Red
R8
Green Red
T8
Green Red
NOTE
In Table 10-5, either R- and R+ or T- and T+ stand for a pair of transmission and reception signals.
Table 10-6 describes the signals listed in Table 10-5. Table 10-6 Pins at both ends of the twisted pair cable Signal Label Ring/RTip/R+ Ring/TTip/T+ Bearing Media One wire of a twisted pair transmitting E1/T1 signals to the BSC One wire of a twisted pair transmitting E1/T1 signals to the BSC One wire of a twisted pair transmitting E1/T1 signals from the BSC One wire of a twisted pair transmitting E1/T1 signals from the BSC
Table 10-7 describes the mapping between the 100-ohm twisted pair cables (W1 and W2) and the pins of the DB44 connector.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-9
10 BSC Cables
Table 10-7 Mapping between the twisted pair cables and the pins of the DB44 connector Twisted Pair Cable W2 Pin of X1 Connector 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Shell Pin of X2 Connector 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Shell Braid PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Pin of X1 Connector 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell Pin of X2 Connector 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell Braid PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR Remarks
NOTE
As listed in Table 10-7, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer of the twisted pair cable.
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable are fixed to the active and standby boards (GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT/GEHUB/GEPUG). The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF, and then to other NEs through a transmission device. Alternatively, the other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is directly connected to an NE. Figure 10-4 shows the installation position of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
10-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-4 Installation position of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable
120-ohm twisted pair cable (active/standby) DDF
EIUa
EIUa
DB44 connector
E1/T1(16~23) E1/T1(24~31) E1/T1(16~23) E1/T1(24~31)
DB44 connector
E1/T1(8~15)
E1/T1(0~7)
PARC
PARC
10.3 Inter-GTNU Cable

The inter-GTNU cable is an optional signal cable. The number of inter-GTNU cables to be configured depends on site requirements. The inter-GTNU cable is used to connect the GTNUs in different subracks.
Appearance
Figure 10-5 shows the inter-GTNU cable. Figure 10-5 Inter-GTNU cable
(1) DB14 (3) Main label (identifying the BOM code, version, and information about the cable manufacturer)
E1/T1(0~7)
E1/T1(8~15)
(2) Label (identifying a group of twisted pair cables)
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-11
10 BSC Cables
The two DB14 connectors at one end of the cable are fixed to the active and standby GTNUs in one subrack. The two DB14 connectors at the other end of the cable are fixed to the active and standby GTNUs in another subrack. Figure 10-6 shows the installation position of the inter-GTNU cable. Figure 10-6 Installation position of the inter-GTNU cable
Inter-GTNU cable
TNUa
TNUa
TNUa
TNUa
TNM1
TNM0
TNM0
TNM0
TNM1
TNM2
TNM2
TNM2
TNM3
TNM3
TNM3
TNM4
TNM4
TNM5
TNM5
TNM4
TNM5
PARC
PARC
PARC
PARC
Active
Standby
Active
Standby
A subrack
B subrack
10.4 LC/PC-LC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable

The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable is an optional cable in the BSC. The number of LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to connect the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT/
TNM5
TNM4
TNM3
TNM2
DB14 connectors
TNM1
TNM1
TNM0
DB14 connectors
10 BSC Cables
GOGUA/GOGUB to the ODF or to other NEs. It can also be used to connect two GOIUTs. It transmits optical signals.
NOTE
l l
One end of the optical cable connected to the board on the BSC side uses an LC/PC optical connector. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC, FC/PC, or SC/PC connector as required. In practice, two optical cables form one pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair should be attached with temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected to the RX port, and vice versa. The TX and RX ends of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, signal transmission may fail.
CAUTION
To prevent signal attenuation and optical return loss as well as to improve transmission quality, you should not use single-mode optical cables and multimode optical cables together to connect telecommunications equipment.
Appearance
Figure 10-7 shows the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable. Figure 10-7 LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable
LC/PC optical connector
One end of the optical cable is connected to the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT/GOGUA/ GOGUB. The other end of the optical cable is connected to the ODF, and is then connected to other NEs through a transmission device, or is directly connected to an NE. This cable can also be used to connect two GOIUTs. Figure 10-8 shows the installation position of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-13
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-8 Installation position of the LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable

GOIUa
RX TX
ODF
LOS
PARC
10.5 LC/PC-FC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable

The LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable is an optional cable in the BSC. The number of LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to connect the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT/ GOGUA/GOGUB to the ODF or to other NEs. It transmits optical signals.
NOTE
TESTOUT
2M1 2M0
l l
10-14
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
CAUTION
Appearance
Figure 10-9 shows the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable. Figure 10-9 LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable
FC/PC optical connector
One end of the optical cable with an LC/PC connector is fixed to the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/ GOIUT/GOGUA/GOGUB. The other end of the optical cable with an FC/PC connector is fixed to the ODF, and is then linked to other NEs through a transmission device, or is directly linked to an NE. Figure 10-10 shows the installation position of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-15
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-10 Installation position of the LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable

OIUa
FC/PC optical connector
RUN ALM ACT
RX TX
ODF
LOS
PARC
10.6 LC/PC-SC/PC Single-Mode/Multimode Optical Cable

The LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable is an optional cable in the BSC. The number of LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to connect the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT/ GOGUA/GOGUB to the ODF or to other NEs. It transmits optical signals.
NOTE
TESTOUT 2M1 2M0
l l
10-16
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
CAUTION
Appearance
Figure 10-11 shows the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable. Figure 10-11 LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable
SC/PC optical connector
One end of the optical cable with an LC/PC connector is fixed to the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/ GOIUT/GOGUA/GOGUB. The other end of the optical cable with an SC/PC connector is fixed to the ODF, and is then linked to other NEs through a transmission device, or is directly linked to an NE. Figure 10-12 shows the installation position of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-17
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-12 Installation position of the LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multimode optical cable

OIUa
SC/PC optical connector
RUN ALM ACT
RX TX
ODF
LOS
PARC
10.7 Crossover Cable

The crossover cable is an optional Ethernet cable. The number of crossover cables to be configured depends on site requirements.
Appearance
Figure 10-13 shows the crossover cable.
10-18
TESTOUT 2M1
2M0
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-13 Crossover cable

B 8 1 X1 B X2
Pin Assignment
Table 10-8 describes the pins at both ends of the crossover cable. Table 10-8 Pins at both ends of the crossover cable X1 End X1-1 X1-2 X1-3 X1-4 X1-5 X1-6 X1-7 X1-8 Wire Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown X2 End X2-1 X2-2 X2-3 X2-4 X2-5 X2-6 X2-7 X2-8 Wire Color White and green Green White and orange Blue White and blue Orange White and brown Brown
10.8 Straight-Through Cable

The straight-through cable is a mandatory Ethernet cable for the BSC. The number of straightthrough cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. When the BSC is configured with the GBAM, the straight-through cable is used to connect:
l l l l l
The GSCU to the GBAM The GBAM to the LAN switch The LAN switch to the M2000 (LAN) The LAN switch to the LMT computer of the BSC The LAN switch to the CBC
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
When the BSC is configured with the GOMU, the straight-through cable is used to connect:
l l l
Connect the GSCUs in different subracks The GOMU to the LAN of the customer The GXPUM to the CBC
Appearance
Figure 10-14 shows the straight-through cable. Figure 10-14 Straight-through cable
B 8 1 X1 B X2
Pin Assignment
Table 10-9 describes the pins at both ends of the straight-through cable. Table 10-9 Pins at both ends of the straight-through cable X1 End X1-1 X1-2 X1-3 X1-4 X1-5 X1-6 X1-7 X1-8 Wire Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown X2 End X2-1 X2-2 X2-3 X2-4 X2-5 X2-6 X2-7 X2-8 Wire Color White and orange Orange White and green Blue White and blue Green White and brown Brown
10-20
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Installation Position (Configuration Type A)

l
When straight-through cables are used to connect the active and standby GSCUs in the GMPS to the GBAM, one end of one straight-through cable is connected to the active GSCU, and the other end of the cable is connected to one internal Ethernet port on the GBAM. (Both ends of each straight-through cable are RJ45 connectors.) One end of the other straight-through cable is connected to the standby GSCU, and the other end of the cable is connected to the other internal Ethernet port on the GBAM. Figure 10-15 shows the installation position of the straight-through cable. Figure 10-15 Connections between the GSCUs and the GBAM
GSCU
RE SE LINK ACT T 0 1 2 3
LINK ACT
GSCU
RE SE LINK ACT T 0 1 2 3
LINK ACT
Straight-through cable
4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7
LINK ACT
8 9 10 11
COM
LINK ACT
8 9 10 11
COM
Active
Standby
GMPS
When the straight-through cable is used to connect the GBAM to the LAN switch, one end of the cable is connected to port 2 on the LAN switch, and the other end of the cable is connected to an external Ethernet port on the GBAM. Figure 10-16 shows the installation position of the straight-through cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-21
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-16 Connection between the GBAM and the LAN switch
Port 2
When the straight-through cable is used to connect the LAN switch to the M2000 (LAN), one end of the cable is connected to port 24 on the LAN switch, and the other end of the cable is connected to the M2000 (LAN). Figure 10-17 shows the installation position of the straight-through cable. Figure 10-17 Connection between the LAN switch and the M2000 (LAN)
M2000
Straight-through cable Port 24
LAN switch
When the straight-through cable is used to connect the LAN switch to the BSC LMT computer, one end of the cable is connected to port 22 on the LAN switch, and the other end of the cable is connected to the BSC LMT computer. Figure 10-18 shows the installation position of the straight-through cable.
10-22
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-18 Connection between the LAN switch and the BSC LMT computer
LMT

LAN switch
When the straight-through cable is used to connect the LAN switch to the CBC, one end of the cable is connected to port 20 on the LAN switch, and the other end of the cable is connected to the corresponding Ethernet port of the CBC. Figure 10-19 shows the installation position of the straight-through cable. Figure 10-19 Connection between the LAN switch and the CBC
CBC

LAN switch
Installation Position (Configuration Type B)

l
The Straight-through cable is used to connect the GSCUs in different subracks. Figure 10-20 shows the installation position of the Straight-through cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-23
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-20 Installation position of the Straight-through cable between the GSCUs
BSC Straightthrough cable
GSCU
GSCU
GSCU
GSCU
RUN ALM ACT

RESET
LINK ACT
RUN ALM ACT

RESET
LINK ACT
RUN ALM ACT

RESET
LIN K ACT
RUN ALM ACT

RESET
LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
LINK ACT LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
4
10/100/1000BASE-T
4
10/100/1000BASE-T
4
10/100/1000BASE-T
4 5 6
10/100/1000BASE-T
5 6
5 6
5 6
7
LINK ACT LINK ACT
7
LINK ACT
7
LINK ACT
8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11
COM
COM
COM
CLKIN
TESTOUT
TESTOUT
TESTOUT
TESTOUT
PARC
PARC
PARC
PARC
Active
Standby
Active
Standby B subrack
A subrack
When the straight-through cable is used to connect the GOMU to the LAN of the customer, one end of the cable is connected to port 0 or port 1 on the GOMU, and the other end of the cable is connected to the Ethernet port of the LAN of the customer. Figure 10-21 shows the installation position of the straight-through cable.
10-24
CLKIN
CLKIN
CLKIN
COM
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-21 Connection between the GOMU and the LAN of the customer
POMU
OMUb
Office LAN
NOTE
The number of Ethernet cables used to connect the active and standby GOMUs to the LAN of the customer can be two or four, depending on the customer's requirement.
l
When the straight-through cable is used to connect the GXPUM to the CBC, one end of the cable is connected to the Ethernet port on the GXPUM panel, and the other end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port of the CBC. Figure 10-22 shows the installation position of the straight-through cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-25
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-22 Connection between the GXPUM and the CBC
XPUa
RUN ALM ACT
CBC
LINK ACT
0 1 2 3
10/100/1000BASE-T
PARC
10.9 BITS Clock Signal Cable

The BITS clock signal cable is an optional clock cable. The number of BITS clock cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to transmit BITS clock signals to the GGCU in the GMPS. Based on the impedance, the BITS clock signal cable is classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cable and 120-ohm clock conversion cable.
10-26
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Appearance
Figure 10-23 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable. Figure 10-23 75-ohm coaxial clock cable
1 2
(1) SMB connector
(2) Label
Figure 10-24 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable. Figure 10-24 120-ohm clock conversion cable
1 2 2
(1) SMB connector
(2) Label
NOTE
There are two SMB connectors at one end of the 120-ohm clock conversion cable. Only one SMB connector is used. The other SMB connector is bound on the wire bushing with a cable tie. Pay attention to the connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.
One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or CLKIN1 port on the GGCU panel, and the other end is connected to the BITS clock port. Figure 10-25 shows the installation position of the BITS clock signal cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-27
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-25 Installation position of the BITS clock signal cable

BITS clock BITS clock
GCUa
GCUa
RUN ALM ACT
RUN ALM ACT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
COM1 COM0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
COM1 COM0
CLKOUT
CLKLIN1 CLKLIN0 TESTIN TESTOUT
PARC
PARC
Active
Standby
10.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable

The Y-shaped clock cable is an optional clock cable. The number of Y-shaped clock cables to be configured depends on actual requirements. This cable is used to transmit the 8 kHz clock signals from the GGCU in the GMPS to the GSCU in the GEPS.
NOTE
You need not use the Y-shaped clock cable if the GEPS is not configured in the BSC.
Appearance
Figure 10-26 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.
10-28
CLKLIN1 CLKLIN0 TESTIN TESTOUT
CLKOUT
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-26 Y-shaped clock cable

2 1 W2 8 1 X1 W1 8 W3 X3
(1) Label (identifying a group of twisted pair cables) (2) RJ45 connector
1 8 X2 1
One end of the Y-shaped clock cable with an RJ45 connector is fixed to the GSCU in the GEPS. The other end with two RJ45 connectors is fixed to the active and standby GGCUs in the GMPS. Figure 10-27 shows the installation position of the Y-shaped clock cable.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-29
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-27 Installation position of the Y-shaped clock cable
SCUa
SCUa
GCUa
GCUa
RUN ALM ACT RESET

LINK ACT
RUN ALM ACT RESET

LINK ACT
Y-shaped clock cable
RUN ALM ACT
RUN ALM ACT
0 0 1 2 3 1 2 3
0 1 2 3
0 1 2 3
LINK ACT LINK ACT
CLKOUT
4
10/100/1000BASE-T
4 5 6
10/100/1000BASE-T
5 6
6 7
6 7
7
LINK ACT LINK ACT
8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11
8 9
COM 0
8 9
COM 0
COM 1
CLKLIN CLKLIN TESTI TESTOU 1 0 N T
TESTOUT
TESTOUT
Y-shaped clock cable
PARC
PARC
PARC
PARC
Active
Standby GEPS
Active GMPS
Standby
10.11 Signal cable of the alarm box

The signal cable of the alarm box is a type of signal cables. It comes in multiple specifications. You can choose one based on actual requirements. The signal cable of the alarm box is used to transmit the alarm information of the system to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
10-30
CLKLIN CLKLIN TESTI TESTOU 1 0 N T
COM
CLKIN
CLKIN
COM
COM 1
CLKOUT
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Appearance
One end of the signal cable is an RJ45 connector, and the other end is a DB9 or DB25 connector. Use the DB9 or DB25 connector in accordance with the site survey report. The following description takes the alarm box signal cable with a DB9 connector as an example. Figure 10-28 shows the alarm box signal cable. Figure 10-28 Alarm box signal cable
A A C 8 1 RJ45 crystal connector C 9 6 5 1
DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 10-10 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable. Table 10-10 Pins of the alarm box signal cable RJ45 3 5 6 DB9 5 2 3
One end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector is fixed to the input serial port of the alarm box. The other end of the signal cable with a DB9 or DB25 connector is fixed to the serial port on the LMT. Figure 10-29 shows the installation position of the signal cable of the alarm box. Figure 10-29 Installation position of the signal cable of the alarm box
Alarm box
LMT Serial port Alarm input serial port
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-31
10 BSC Cables
10.12 PDB monitoring signal cable

The power distribution box (PDB) monitoring signal cable is used to transmit monitoring signals from the PDB to the service subracks.
Appearance
Figure 10-30 shows the PDB monitoring signal cable. Figure 10-30 PDB monitoring signal cable
A Pos.1 A Pos.9 SHELL X1 W B Pos.15 B Pos.1
Label
X2 SHELL
The PDB monitoring signal cable uses a DB9 connector at one end and a DB15 connector at the other end. Table 10-11 describes the pins of the PDB monitoring signal cable. Table 10-11 Pins of the PDB monitoring signal cable Start Point X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.SHELL End Point X2.3 X2.2 X2.7 X2.6 X2.5 X2.SHELL Meaning Tx+ TxRx+ RxRTN X1.SHELL is connected to X2.SHELL through the shielding layer. Twisted pair Remarks Twisted pair
Table 10-12 describes the pins of the PDB monitoring signal cable.
10-32
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Table 10-12 Pins of the PDB monitoring signal cable Signal Label Tx+ TxRx+ RxPin Assignment Positive phase signal transmitted Negative phase signal transmitted Positive phase signal received Negative phase signal received
One end of the PDB monitoring signal cable with a DB15 connector is fixed to the service subrack port on the PDB. The other end of the PDB monitoring signal cable with a DB9 connector is fixed to the MONITOR socket on the metal shielding board of the subrack that is located at the bottom of the BSC cabinet. Figure 10-31 shows the installation positions of the PDB monitoring signal cable. Figure 10-31 Installation positions of the PDB monitoring signal cable
Port connecting the power distribution box to a service subrack Power distribution box
Service subrack
MONITOR
PDB monitoring signal cable
NOTE
When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to top. Therefore, the PDB monitoring signal cable is always connected to the subrack at the bottom of the cabinet.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-33
10 BSC Cables
10.13 EMU RS485 communication cable

The RS485 communication cable is used for the communication between the BSC and the EMU.
Appearance
Figure 10-32 shows the RS485 communication cable. Figure 10-32 RS485 communication cable
A A C 8 1 RJ45 crystal connector C 9 6 5 1
DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 10-13 lists the pins of the RS485 communication cable. Table 10-13 Pins of the RS485 communication cable RJ45 4 1 5 2 DB9 2 3 6 7
One end of the RS485 communication cable with a DB9 male connector is fixed to the DB9 socket on the environment monitoring device. The other end of the RS485 communication cable with an RJ45 connector is connected to the COM1 port on the BSC common power distribution box or to the J1 port on the BSC high-power distribution box. as shown inFigure 10-33
10-34
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-33 Connecting the cable between the EMU and the power distribution box of the cabinet
Power distribution box B A
The bottom of EMU-2A
The bottom of EMU-2A
Back
NOTE
l l
The EMU inherits all the functions of the EAC. Compared with the EAC, the EMU has a different hardware structure. One environment monitoring instrument is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal cable (2 m). Choose one of the signal cables based on actual needs. RS485 is usually preferred. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the delivered signal cable is not long enough.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-35
10 BSC Cables
10.14 GOMU serial port cable

The GOMU serial port cable is used to connect the GOMU to the local maintenance terminal.
Appearance
Figure 10-34 shows the GOMU serial port cable. Figure 10-34 GOMU serial port cable
A Pos.1 A W Pos.9 X1 X2 Pos.9 1 2 Pos.1 B B
Pin Assignment
Both ends of the GOMU serial port cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 10-14 lists the pins of the GOMU serial port cable. Table 10-14 Pins of the GOMU serial port cable DB9 2 3 5 DB9 3 2 5
One end of the GOMU serial port cable is connected to the COM serial port on the GOMU. The other end of the GOMU serial port cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance terminal.
10.15 BSC Power Cable

The BSC power cables are classified into external power cables and internal power cables. The power cables are mandatory, which consist of -48 V power cables and RTN power cables. The BSC external power cables need to be installed on site. They are used to lead the power from the power distribution frame (PDF) to the power distribution box in the BSC. The BSC internal power cables are installed before delivery. They are used to lead the power from the power distribution box to each board and module in the BSC.
10 BSC Cables
Table 10-15 lists the BSC external power cables. Table 10-15 List of the BSC external power cables Name Color CrossSectional Area (Unit: mm2) Connector Type/ Installation Position (Power Distribution Box) Cord end terminal/-48 V input of the BSC6000 cabinet Cord end terminal/-48 V input of the BSC6000 cabinet Connector Type/ Installation Position (PDF) Quantity
Externa l -48 V power cable Externa l RTN power cable
Blue
25/35
OT terminal/-48 V output of the PDF OT terminal/-48 V output of the PDF
2 per cabinet
Black
25/35
2 per cabinet
Table 10-16 lists the BSC internal power cables. Table 10-16 List of the BSC internal power cables Name Color CrossSectional Area (Unit: mm2) Connector Type/ Installation Position (Power Distribution Box) Cord end terminal/-48 V input terminal Cord end terminal/-48 V input terminal Connector Type/ Installation Position (Subrack) Quantity
Internal -48 V power cable Internal RTN power cable
Blue
OT terminal/-48 V output terminal OT terminal/-48 V output terminal
2 per subrack
Black
2 per subrack
The BSC external power cable and the BSC internal power cable have the same appearance, as shown in Figure 10-35.
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-35 BSC external/internal power cable
X1
X1:Cord end terminal
X2
X2:OT terminal
Table 10-17 List of the BSC external power cables Name Color CrossSectional Area (Unit: mm2) Connector Type/ Installation Position (Power Distribution Box) OT terminal/-48 V input of the BSC6000 cabinet OT terminal/-48 V input of the BSC6000 cabinet Connector Type/ Installation Position (PDF) Quantity
Externa l -48 V power cable Externa l RTN power cable
Blue
25/35
OT terminal/-48 V output of the PDF OT terminal/-48 V output of the PDF
2 per cabinet
Black
25/35
2 per cabinet
Table 10-18 List of the BSC internal power cables Name Color CrossSectional Area (Unit: mm2) Connector Type/ Installation Position (Power Distribution Box) OT terminal/-48 V input terminal Connector Type/ Installation Position (Subrack) Quantity
Internal -48 V power cable
Blue
OT terminal/-48 V output terminal
2 per subrack
10-38
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Name
Color
CrossSectional Area (Unit: mm2)
Connector Type/ Installation Position (Power Distribution Box) OT terminal/-48 V input terminal
Connector Type/ Installation Position (Subrack)
Quantity
Internal RTN power cable
Black
OT terminal/-48 V output terminal
2 per subrack
Figure 10-36 shows the BSC external power cable or the BSC internal power cable. Figure 10-36 BSC external/internal power cable
10.16 BSC PGND cable

The BSC PGND cables consist of the PGND cable for the cabinet, inter-cabinet PGND cable, PGND cable for the power distribution box, PGND cable for the subracks, and PGND cable for the cabinet door. All these cables are mandatory. Each BSC cabinet must be configured with one PGND cable for the cabinet. For combined cabinets, adjacent cabinets should be configured with three inter-cabinet PGND cables. All other PGND cables are installed before delivery.
NOTE
The same types of PGND cables are used regardless of whether the BSC cabinet is configured with the common power distribution box or with the high-power distribution box.
Table 10-19 lists the BSC PGND cables.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-39
10 BSC Cables
Table 10-19 List of the BSC PGND cables Name Color CrossSectional Area (Unit: mm2) Connect or Type/ Installati on Position (One End) OT terminal/ grounding bolt at the rear of the BSC cabinet top OT terminal/ PGND busbar of the BSC cabinet OT terminal/ PGND busbar of the BSC cabinet OT terminal/ PGND busbar of the BSC cabinet OT terminal/ grounding screw on the base of the BSC cabinet Connector Type/ Installation Position (Other End) Quantity
PGND cable for the cabinet
Green and yellow
25/35
OT terminal/ PGND output terminal of the PDF
1 per cabinet
Intercabinet PGND cable
Green and yellow
OT terminal/ PGND busbar of the BSC cabinet
3 for two adjacent cabinets
PGND cable for the power distributio n box PGND cable for the BSC subrack
Green and yellow
OT terminal/ PGND port on the PDB
1 per power distribution box
Green and yellow
OT terminal/ PGND port of the subrack
2 per subrack
PGND cable for the cabinet door
Green and yellow
OT terminal/ grounding screw on the BSC cabinet door
8 per cabinet
Different types of BSC PGND cables have the same appearance. Figure 10-37 shows the BSC PGND cable.
10-40
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10 BSC Cables
Figure 10-37 BSC PGND cable
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
10-41
11 LEDs on BSC Parts
11
About This Chapter
LEDs on BSC Parts
This describes the LEDs on the power distribution box and the panels. 11.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box The LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box are labeled RUN and ALM. 11.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box The LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box are labeled RUN and ALM. 11.3 LEDs on the GDPUC(DPUa) Panel The LEDs on the GDPUC panel are labeled RUN, ALM, and ACT respectively. 11.4 LEDs on the GDPUP(DPUd) Panel The LEDs on the GDPUP panel are RUN, ALM, and ACT. 11.5 LEDs on the GDPUX(DPUc) Panel The LEDs on the GDPUX panel are RUN, ALM, and ACT. 11.6 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 11.7 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa)Panel The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 11.8 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (for Ethernet port), and ACT (for Ethernet port). 11.9 LEDs on the GGCU Panel There are three LEDs on the GGCU panel: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
11.10 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 11.11 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel The physical boards of the GOIUA, GOIUB, GOIUP and GOIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. There are four LEDs on the panel of each of these boards: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS. 11.12 LEDs on the GOMU Panel There are five LEDs on the GOMU panel: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD. 11.13 LEDs on the GSCU Panel There are four types of LEDs on the GSCU panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. 11.14 LEDs on the GTNU Panel There are three LEDs on the GTNU panel: RUN, ALM, and ACT. 11.15 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel There are four types of LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. 11.16 LEDs on the MDMC Panel There are two LEDs on the MDMC panel: RUN and ALM. 11.17 LEDs on the PAMU Panel There are two LEDs on the PAMU panel: RUN and ALM.
11-2
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
11.1 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC Common Power Distribution Box
The LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box are labeled RUN and ALM. Table 11-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box. Table 11-1 LEDs on the front panel of the BSC common power distribution box LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s Off ALM Red Off On Meaning The MDMC is operating and communicating with the GSCU. The MDMC is not operating or not communicating with the GSCU. There is no power supply to the MDMC or the power distribution box is faulty. There is no alarm. The power distribution box is faulty. The ALM LED, however, is always on during the MDMC self-test. It is an indication that the ALM LED is functional.
NOTE
11.2 LEDs on the Front Panel of the BSC High-Power Distribution Box
The LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box are labeled RUN and ALM. Table 11-2 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box. Table 11-2 LEDs on the front panel of the BSC high-power distribution box LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s Meaning The PAMU is working and communicating with the GSCU.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
11-3
LED
Color
Status On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s Off
Meaning The PAMU is not working or not communicating with the GSCU. The PAMU has no power input or the power distribution box is faulty. There is no alarm. The power distribution box is faulty. The ALM LED, however, is always on during the PAMU self-test. It is an indication that the ALM LED is functional.
ALM
Red
Off On
NOTE
11.3 LEDs on the GDPUC(DPUa) Panel

The LEDs on the GDPUC panel are labeled RUN, ALM, and ACT respectively. Table 11-3 describes the LEDs on the GDPUC panel. Table 11-3 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works properly. There is no power input or the board is faulty.
11-4
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
11.4 LEDs on the GDPUP(DPUd) Panel

The LEDs on the GDPUP panel are RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 11-4 describes the LEDs on the GDPUP panel. Table 11-4 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works properly. There is no power input or the board is faulty.
11.5 LEDs on the GDPUX(DPUc) Panel

The LEDs on the GDPUX panel are RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 11-5 describes the LEDs on the GDPUX panel. Table 11-5 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm.
11-5
Red
Off
LED
Color
Status On or blinking
Meaning There is an alarm. The board works properly. There is no power input or the board is faulty.
ACT
Green
On Off
11.6 LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 11-6 describes the LEDs on the GEHUB/GEPUG panel. Table 11-6 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
11.7 LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 11-7 describes the LEDs on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT panel.
11-6
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
11.8 LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG(FG2a) Panel

The physical boards of the GFGUA, GFGUB, and GFGUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (for Ethernet port), and ACT (for Ethernet port). Table 11-8 describes the LEDs on the GFGUA/GFGUB/GFGUG panel. Table 11-8 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off
Issue 01 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
11-7
11.9 LEDs on the GGCU Panel

There are three LEDs on the GGCU panel: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 11-10 describes the three LEDs on the GGCU panel. Table 11-10 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
11-8
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
11.10 LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB(GOUa) Panel

The physical boards of the GOGUA and GOGUB are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. These boards have the same types of LEDs on the panels: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 11-11 describes the LEDs on the GOGUA/GOGUB panel. Table 11-11 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
11.11 LEDs on the GOIUA/GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT(OIUa) Panel

Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
11-9
LED
Colo r
Status On Off
ALM
Red
Off On or blinking
ACT
Gree n Gree n
On Off On Off
LOS
11.12 LEDs on the GOMU Panel

There are five LEDs on the GOMU panel: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD. Table 11-13 describes the LEDs on the GOMU panel. Table 11-13 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
11-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
LED OFFLINE
Color Blue
Status On Off On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s
Meaning The board can be removed. The board cannot be removed. The status of the board is switching. The hard disk is performing read and write functions. The hard disk is not performing read and write functions.
HD
Green
Blinking
Off
11.13 LEDs on the GSCU Panel

There are four types of LEDs on the GSCU panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. Table 11-14 describes the LEDs on the GSCU panel. Table 11-14 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
Table 11-15 describes the LEDs of the Ethernet ports on the GSCU panel.
Table 11-15 LEDs of the Ethernet ports LED LINK Color Green Status On Meaning LEDs of the Ethernet ports, indicating that the link is connected LEDs of the Ethernet ports, indicating that the link is disconnected LEDs of the Ethernet ports, indicating that there is a data flow LEDs of the Ethernet ports, indicating that there is no data flow
Off
ACT
Green
Blinking
Off
11.14 LEDs on the GTNU Panel

There are three LEDs on the GTNU panel: RUN, ALM, and ACT. Table 11-16 describes the LEDs on the GTNU panel. Table 11-16 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
11-12
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
11.15 LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI(XPUa) Panel

There are four types of LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel: the RUN, ALM, and ACT LEDs, and the LEDs of the Ethernet ports. Table 11-17 describes the LEDs on the GXPUM/GXPUT/GXPUI panel. Table 11-17 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On Off ALM Red Off On or blinking ACT Green On Off Meaning The board is working. The board is loading data. There is power input but the board is faulty. There is no power input or the board is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.
NOTE
11.16 LEDs on the MDMC Panel

There are two LEDs on the MDMC panel: RUN and ALM. Table 11-18 describes the LEDs on the MDMC panel. Table 11-18 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Meaning The board is working and communicating with the GSCU. The board cannot communicate with the GSCU, or the board is not working.
11-13
LED
Color
Status Off
Meaning There is no power supply or the power distribution box is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. When the board is starting up, the status indicates that the ALM indicator functions well.
ALM
Red
Off On
11.17 LEDs on the PAMU Panel

There are two LEDs on the PAMU panel: RUN and ALM. Table 11-19 describes the LEDs on the PAMU panel. Table 11-19 LEDs on the board LED RUN Color Green Status On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.25s and off for 0.25s Off ALM Red Off On Meaning The board is working and communicating with the GSCU. The board cannot communicate with the GSCU, or the board is not working. There is no power supply or the power distribution box is faulty. There is no alarm. There is an alarm. When the board is starting up, the status indicates that the ALM indicator functions well.
11-14
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
12 DIP Switches on BSC Parts
12
About This Chapter
DIP Switches on BSC Parts
This describes the DIP switches on the subracks and the boards. 12.1 DIP Switches on the BSC Subrack This describes the DIP switch on the BSC subrack. The DIP switch on the BSC subrack is used to define the numbering of the BSC subrack. 12.2 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa) The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. 12.3 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT(EIUa) The physical boards of the GEIUA, GEIUB, GEIUP, and GEIUT are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6. 12.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC There is a DIP switch labeled S2 on the MDMC. 12.5 DIP Switch on the PAMU There is a DIP switch labeled SW1 on the PAMU. 12.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU There is a DIP switch labeled SW1 on the PFCU.
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
12-1
12.1 DIP Switches on the BSC Subrack

This describes the DIP switch on the BSC subrack. The DIP switch on the BSC subrack is used to define the numbering of the BSC subrack.
Appearance
Figure 12-1 shows the DIP switches on the BSC subrack. Figure 12-1 DIP switch on the BSC subrack
ON
Meaning of the DIP Bits

The DIP bits are numbered in ascending order from bit 1 to bit 8. ON represents digit 0 and OFF represents digit 1. Table 12-1 provides the definitions of the bits. Table 12-1 Definitions of the DIP bits DIP Bit 1 (the least significant bit) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (the most significant bit) Meaning Subrack number setting bit Subrack number setting bit Subrack number setting bit Subrack number setting bit Subrack number setting bit Odd parity check bit Reserved, undefined, generally set to 0 (ON)
l l
For the GMPS, the bit should be set to 1 (OFF). For the GEPS and GTCS, the bit should be set to 0 (ON).
Bit 8 (the most significant bit) is used to set the startup mode of the GSCU in the subrack. The definitions of this bit are as follows:

l
If this bit is set to 0 (the status of the DIP bit is ON), the GSCU is set to Not Start Automatically. The startup of the GSCU depends on the GOMU. In other words, when the GSCU is started, it loads data from the GOMU. If this bit is set to 1 (the status of the DIP bit is OFF), the GSCU is set to Start Automatically. When the GSCU is started, it checks whether the Flash file is valid. If the Flash file is valid, the GSCU loads data from the Flash. If the Flash file is invalid, the GSCU loads data from the GOMU.
Setting Scheme
As the DIP switches use odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight DIP bits must be an odd number. The setting should adhere to the following principles: 1. 2. 3. Set DIP bits 1 through 5 and DIP bit 8. Set DIP bit 7 to 0. Count the number of 1s that have been set.
l l
If the number of 1s is even, set DIP bit 6 to 1. If the number of 1s is odd, set DIP bit 6 to 0.
Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 3. For the setting of the DIP switches in this case, refer to Table 12-2. Subrack 0 should be the GMPS. Subracks 1 to 3 may be the GEPS or the GTCS. Table 12-2 Setting of the DIP switches Subr ack No. 0 DIP Bit 1 0 (ON) 1 1 (OFF) 2 0 (ON) 3 1 (OFF) 2 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 1 (OFF) 1 (OFF) 3 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 4 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 5 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 6 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 1 (OFF) 7 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 8 1 (OFF) 0 (ON) 0 (ON) 0 (ON)
12.2 DIP Switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG(PEUa)

The physical boards of the GEHUB and GEPUG are the same. After being loaded with different software, the physical boards perform different functions. They have the same types of DIP switches: S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. Figure 12-2 shows the DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG.
Figure 12-2 DIP switches on the GEHUB/GEPUG
S2 S4 S8 S6
8 1
1 8
ON S10 OFF
(1) Sub-board
(2) Bottom plate
NOTE
l l
The DIP switches, S2, S4, S6, and S8, are used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting ends of E1/T1 links 0 to 31, and S10 is used to set the E1 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 working mode. Table 12-3 and Table 12-4 describe S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10. Table 12-3 DIP switches on GEHUB/GEPUG (75-ohm coaxial cable) DIP Switch S2 DIP Bit 1-8 Description Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 24-31 Switch Status ON Meaning 0
12-4
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
DIP Switch S4
DIP Bit 1-8
Description Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 16-23 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 0-7 Used to set the protection grounding of the transmitting end of E1/T1 links 8-15 Work mode switch, consisting of two DIP bits.
Switch Status ON
Meaning 0
S6
1-8
ON
S8
1-8
ON
S10
1-2
(0, 0)
S4
1-8
OFF
S6
1-8
OFF
S8
1-8
OFF
S10
1-2
(1, 0) (0, 1)
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
12-5
12.3 DIP Switches on the GEIUA/GEIUB/GEIUP/GEIUT (EIUa)

1 S6 1 S5 1 S4 1 S3
ON OFF
1 S1
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
(1) Sub-board
(2) Bottom plate
CAUTION
S1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1-4 S3 1-8
ON
OFF
S4
1-8
ON
OFF
S5
1-8
ON
OFF
S6
1-8
ON
OFF
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
12-7
l
NOTE
l l l l
12.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC

There is a DIP switch labeled S2 on the MDMC. Figure 12-4 shows the DIP switch on the MDMC. Figure 12-4 DIP switch on the MDMC
1 4
ON OFF
S2
S2 is used to set the address of the MDMC. To set the address of the MDMC, pull out the MDMC, and then set S2 by referring to Table 12-7.
12-8
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Table 12-7 Setting of S2 Address 0 DIP Bit 1 (the most significant bit) 2 3 4 (the least significant bit) Switch Status ON ON ON ON Meaning 0 0 0 0
NOTE
In the BSC, the DIP switch on the MDMC must be set according to the specifications listed in Table 12-7.
12.5 DIP Switch on the PAMU

There is a DIP switch labeled SW1 on the PAMU. Figure 12-5 shows the DIP switch on the PAMU. Figure 12-5 DIP switch on the PAMU
ON
SW1 OFF
SW1 (with four bits) is used to set the address of the PAMU. To set the address of the PAMU, pull out the PAMU, and then set SW1 by referring to Table 12-8. Table 12-8 Settings of SW1 Address 0 DIP Bit 1 (the most significant bit) 2 3
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)
Switch Status ON ON ON
Meaning 0 0 0
12-9
Address
DIP Bit 4 (the least significant bit)
Switch Status ON
Meaning 0
NOTE
In the BSC, the DIP switch on the PAMU must be set according to the specifications listed in Table 12-8.
12.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU

There is a DIP switch labeled SW1 on the PFCU. Figure 12-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU. Figure 12-6 DIP switch on the PFCU
1 4
SW1
ON OFF
SW1 (with four bits) is used to set the address of the PFCU. To set the address of the PFCU, pull out the fan box, and then set SW1 by referring to Table 12-9. For how to pull out the fan box, refer to Replacing the BSC Fan Box. After the setting, the address of the PFCU is 1. Table 12-9 Settings of S1 Address SW1 DIP Bit 1 (the least significant bit) 2 3 4 (the most significant bit) Switch Status OFF ON ON ON Meaning 1 0 0 0
NOTE
In the BSC, the DIP switch on the PFCU must be set according to the specifications listed in Table 12-9.
12-10
Issue 01 (2010-01-30)

BSC6000 Hardware Description

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

BSC6000 Hardware Description

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R V900R008C15

BSC Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

BSC installers BSC site maintenance personnel

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

Convention Boldface >

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

5 GBCR (Configuration Type A)................................................................................................5-1

6 GBCR (Configuration Type B)................................................................................................6-1

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

10 BSC Cables.............................................................................................................................. 10-1

11 LEDs on BSC Parts.................................................................................................................11-1

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

12 DIP Switches on BSC Parts..................................................................................................12-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

1 Changes in BSC Hardware Description

Changes in BSC Hardware Description

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

2 BSC Physical Structure

BSC Physical Structure

Serial port cable

LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

Table 2-1 lists the components of the BSC.

PDF: Power Distribution Frame

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 BSC Physical Structure

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

GSM BSC service processing rack (GBSR)

User manual delivered with the alarm box

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

3 BSC Hardware Configuration Modes

BSC Hardware Configuration Modes

GMPS GEPS GTCS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3 BSC Hardware Configuration Modes

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller GSM-R BSC Hardware Description

Descripti on BM/TC separated (external PCU)

Cable Active/standby 120ohm twisted pair cable Inter-GTNU cable

GMPS GEPS GTCS

BM/TC combined (built-in PCU)